JP7347596B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2009-261415A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform display control.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a display means for displaying an image;
image information storage means for storing image data in advance;
readout storage means for storing the image data read out from the image information storage means;
instruction control means for providing instruction information for instructing the content of the image to be displayed on the display means;
Display control means for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data according to the content instructed in the instruction information;
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
a first control means for causing the image data set to be used in predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means to be read into the read storage means;
a second control means for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data read into the read storage means according to the content instructed in the predetermined instruction information;
Equipped with
Storage source information for specifying an area where the image data is stored in the image information storage means is set in the predetermined instruction information,
When the image data specified in the predetermined instruction information is read into the read storage means by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the first control means setting storage destination information for specifying an area from which the image data has been read in the reading storage means in the predetermined instruction information;
The second control means reads out the image data specified in the predetermined instruction information by using the predetermined instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the first control means. The image data is read out from a storage area of the readout storage means, and the image is displayed on the display means based on the readout image data being used in accordance with the contents instructed in the predetermined instruction information. can be,
The first control means controls the predetermined control means in a situation where the second control means is performing a process of displaying an image on the display means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at a predetermined update timing. The image data is read into the read storage means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at an update timing later than the update timing of
A storage area for storing the predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means and a storage area for storing the predetermined instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the first control means has been completed are distinguished. and
The specific image data is configured to be stored across a plurality of storage areas in the readout storage means,
The first control means is configured to identify the plurality of storage areas when the specific image data is read into the plurality of storage areas by executing a transfer process using the storage source information. The apparatus is characterized by comprising means for setting the identification information of as the storage destination information in the predetermined instruction information .

According to the present invention, display control can be suitably performed.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the main display device. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the main display device. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a variable display unit for explaining a first sub-display device and a second sub-display device. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the movement mode of each sub-display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for jackpot occurrence lottery and the like. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the distribution side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed by the distribution side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electric composition of a production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by CPU for effects. It is a flowchart which shows task processing for display control performed by CPU for presentation. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of registers used when a 2D control unit and a 3D control unit execute drawing processing. 6(a) to 7(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a 2D drawing list. FIG. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a 3D drawing list. 3 is a flowchart showing 2D drawing processing executed by a 2D control unit. It is a flowchart which shows 3D drawing processing performed by a 3D control part. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created as 3D drawing processing is executed. 5A to 5C are time charts for explaining the timing at which drawing data is created and the timing at which image data is pre-transferred. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pre-transfer storage area and a post-transfer storage area. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pre-transfer area, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an identification information counter. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for a search. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the address information of the drawing list and the address ID of the search table are rewritten. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing list output process performed by CPU for effects. (a) to (e) The image data necessary to start the performance for the next game round is read into the pre-transfer area at least at a timing that allows the start of the performance for the next game round. It is a time chart showing the situation. 3 is a flowchart showing advance transfer processing executed by a advance transfer control unit. 7 is a flowchart illustrating address information rewriting processing executed by a pre-transfer control unit. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a file table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between a VRAM and an index area. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an index table. 5 is a flowchart showing a transfer execution process executed by a transfer controller. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of one drawing list that is set by collecting image data corresponding to each display device. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining an execution target table for display control. It is a flowchart which shows the creation process of the drawing list performed by CPU for effects. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for outputting image signals to each sub-display device. (a) to (e) How one piece of drawing data is created in order to display one frame of image on each sub-display device, and how each sub-display device is created using that one drawing data. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how one frame of images is displayed in each of the images. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how image signals are output to each display device. It is a flowchart which shows the write process performed by a 2D control part. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process in a sub-display drawing area executed by a 2D control unit. 7 is a flowchart showing signal output processing executed by the second display circuit. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of an execution object table for display control in a displacement performance period. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a right-handed hitting notification image displayed on each display device. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of data stored in a memory module, and (b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents displayed as a right-handed notification image on the sub side. . (a) to (d) are time charts showing how the rotation speed of the right-handed hitting notification image on the sub side is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display device. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for right-handed hitting notification performed by CPU for presentation. (a) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the effect using images for the rotation period. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the rotational movement display performed by CPU for presentation. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a method of creating image data for displaying rotation period images at the pachinko machine design stage, and (e) explains the contents of data stored in the memory module. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an event that is a target of abnormality notification. (a) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display modes of abnormality notification images. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display mode of an abnormality notification image during a period in which an effect of displacing the sub-display device is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process of the notification command performed by CPU for presentation. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for notification performed by CPU for presentation. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of data stored in a memory module. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of normal moving image data, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of special moving image data. 5A to 5C are time charts showing how the decoding process of moving image data is executed using a period in which an image using attached image data is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows the use setting process of moving image data performed by CPU for presentation. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed by a video decoder. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drawing area for sub-display in the second embodiment. 3 is a flowchart illustrating drawing data synthesis processing for sub-display performed by a 3D control unit. 12 is a flowchart showing address information rewriting processing executed by a pre-transfer control unit in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing list output process performed by CPU for effects in 4th Embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing advance transfer processing executed by a advance transfer control unit.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 21 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 21.

An inner rail part 22 and an outer rail part 23 are attached to the game board 21 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 22 and the outer rail part 23 form a guide means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 21 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball firing mechanism performs a game ball firing operation when a firing operation device 24 provided on the front door frame 14 is manually operated.

The game board 21 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, etc. ing.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first operating port 33 or a ball enters the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball enters the general winning hole 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. executed.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an out port 21a is provided at the bottom of the game board 21, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 21a. Further, the game board 21 has a large number of nails 21b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 21a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 21 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning in the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and a general figure display of the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the general figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power open state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the main display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

Specifically regarding the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display section 37a is narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a changing display of symbols is performed when a jackpot lottery is held triggered by a winning at the first operating port 33 or a winning at the second operating port 34. Then, as a stop result after the fluctuating display of the symbols is performed, a display corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is performed. Note that the special figure display section 37a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the designs displayed on the special figure display section 37a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration where .

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure pending display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the special symbol reservation display section 37b.

More specifically about the main display device 41, the main display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by an effect control device 80, which will be described later. Note that the main display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the main display device 41, when a variable display of a symbol is performed on the special symbol display section 37a based on a winning at the first operating port 33 or a winning at the second operating port 34, the variable display of the symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of the symbol. be exposed. That is, when a variable display is performed on the special figure display section 37a, a variable display is performed on the main display device 41 accordingly. For example, in a game round in which the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the main display device 41.

The display contents of the main display device 41 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3(a) to 3(j) are diagrams individually showing the symbols displayed variably on the main display device 41, and FIG. 4(a) and FIG. 4(b) are diagrams showing the display screen of the main display device 41. FIG.

As shown in Figures 3(a) to 3(j), the patterns, which are a type of pattern, include nine types of main patterns with numbers from "1" to "9" attached to them, and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface of the main display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set as a plurality of display areas: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the display screen is designed so that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, five effective lines are set on the display surface, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and with a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any active line formed, all symbol rows Z1 When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 ends, a jackpot video is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result, which will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) The main pattern corresponds to a "non-specific pattern." When a 15R probability-variable jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R guaranteed variable jackpot result, which will be described later, the variable display of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination formed, and then, A demonstration video is now displayed.

The manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the main display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the main display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned patterns, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the patterns.

In addition, based on winning in either of the operating ports 33, 34, a variable display is started on the special figure display section 37a and the main display device 41, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the above variable display is stopped. corresponds to one game round.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, if you win a jackpot in the jackpot lottery based on winning the first operating port 33 or winning the second operating port 34, you can win the prize in the special electric winning device 32. Shifts to opening/closing execution mode. The special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 21, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, but if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery, it can be switched to the open state in which game balls can win prizes. It has become. Incidentally, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game will transition in the event of a winning result. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the main display device 41.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the fact that the center frame 42 provided to surround the main display device 41 in the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 21, the game area PA is variable. an upper area that is an area above a predetermined height position of the display unit 36; a left area that is continuous below the upper area and is to the left of the variable display unit 36; and an area below the upper area. a right side area which is an area continuous to the right side of the variable display unit 36; and a lower side area which is an area below the variable display unit 36 and continuous below each of the left side area and the right side area. It is divided into. In this case, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are provided in the lower region. In addition, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage 42a formed in the center frame 42, and the game ball discharged from the center of the stage 42a to the outside of the variable display unit 36 enters the first operating port 33. In addition, the entrance portion of the guide passage that allows the game ball to be guided onto the stage 42a is formed so as to allow the game ball to enter from the left side area. Therefore, it is better to perform the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the left side area than to perform the firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area. This makes it easier for game balls to enter the ball. On the other hand, the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided in the right area. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs, if the firing operation was performed so that the game ball would flow down the left side area, it is necessary to change the firing operation mode so that the game ball flows down the right side area. There is.

Here, the variable display unit 36 is provided with a first sub-display device 43 and a second sub-display device 44 in addition to the main display device 41 described above. The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 will be explained with reference to FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the variable display unit 36 for explaining the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. As shown in FIG.

The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are each configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by an effect control device to be described later. Note that the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are not limited to liquid crystal display devices, and may be other display devices having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may also be a dot matrix display. Furthermore, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are not limited to a configuration in which the same type of display device is used; The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 may be configured to use different types of display devices, such as one being a liquid crystal display device and the other being a dot matrix display device.

The first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are display devices having the same shape, and have the same display screen resolution, display screen shape, and display screen size. Both the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 have a rectangular shape. The display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are both narrower than the display surface of the main display device 41, and furthermore, the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device The total area of the display surface of the device 44 is also smaller than the display surface of the main display device 41. Furthermore, the long side dimension of the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 is shorter than the dimension of any side of the rectangular display surface of the main display device 41, and the long side dimension of the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 The dimension of is shorter than the dimension of any side of the rectangular display surface of the main display device 41. As a result, even in a configuration in which the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are provided separately from the main display device 41, the player's attention to the main display device 41 is extremely reduced. It is possible to prevent this.

Both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged in front of the display surface of the main display device 41. The first sub-display device 43 is provided with a first drive unit 45 for sliding and rotating the first sub-display device 43 in front of the main display device 41. A second drive unit 46 is provided for sliding and rotating the second sub-display device 44 in front of the main display device 41.

The first drive unit 45 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 above a rectangular opening 42b that exposes the display surface of the main display device 41 in the center frame 42 toward the front of the game board 21. The second drive unit 46 is provided on the back side of the center frame 42 below the opening 42b. That is, the center frame 42 is provided with a pair of upper and lower drive units 45 and 46.

The first drive unit 45 and the second drive unit 46 have the same configuration. Specifically, each drive unit 45, 46 is capable of reciprocating in the lateral direction along drive rails 45a, 46a extending in the lateral direction, and drives each sub-display device 43, 44. Slide drive motors 45c, 46c that enable the supporting members 45b, 46b to be reciprocated in the vertical direction, and rotationally driving the respective sub-display devices 43, 44 rotatably supported on the supporting members 45b, 46b. Rotary drive motors 45d and 46d are provided. Each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is supported by rotary drive motors 45d and 46d so that its display surface faces forward of the pachinko machine 10, which is the same direction as the display surface of the main display device 41. When 45d and 46d are in the driving state, the pachinko machine 10 rotates with the front-rear direction as the rotation axis.

The support members 45b, 46b have a long plate shape, and are mounted on the slide drive motors 45c, 46c so that their longitudinal direction is the vertical direction. In this case, a combination of the first sub-display device 43 and a rotary drive motor 45d is mounted on the lower end side of the support member 45b of the first drive unit 45, and a second A combination of a sub-display device 44 and a rotary drive motor 46d is mounted. When the slide drive motors 45c, 46c are in a driving state to move the support members 45b, 46b in the vertical direction, the support members 45b, 46b are moved in the vertical direction, and are integrated with the support members 45b, 46b accordingly. The combination of sub-display devices 43, 44 and rotary drive motors 45d, 46d moves in the vertical direction. Moreover, by entering the driving state in which the slide drive motors 45c, 46c move laterally along the drive rails 45a, 46a, the slide drive motors 45c, 46c move laterally, and accordingly, the slide drive motor 45c , 46c, the combination of sub-display devices 43, 44, support members 45b, 46b, and rotary drive motors 45d, 46d moves laterally.

The state shown in FIG. 5 is a state in which the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are each placed at the initial position. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 is arranged at the upper side of the opening 42b of the center frame 42 in a horizontally long posture, and the lower half of the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 is the display screen of the main display device 41. It is exposed through the opening 42b at the front of the surface, and the upper half is hidden behind the center frame 42. Further, the second sub-display device 44 is also disposed at the lower side of the opening 42b of the center frame 42 in a horizontally long posture, and the upper half of the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 is the display surface of the main display device 41. It is exposed through the opening 42b in front of the center frame 42, and its lower half is hidden behind the center frame 42. In this manner, in a situation where both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial position, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are spaced apart in the vertical direction. Further, in a situation where both sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position, the horizontal positions of each sub-display device 43 and 44 are the same. As a result, the entire lower surface of the first sub-display device 43 faces the entire upper surface of the second sub-display device 44.

FIGS. 6A and 6B are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the movement mode of each sub-display device 43 and 44. FIG. In a situation where each sub-display device 43, 44 is arranged at the initial position, the slide drive motors 45c, 46c are in a driving state to move the supporting members 45b, 46b downward, thereby maintaining the horizontally long posture. While the first sub-display device 43 moves downward, the second sub-display device 44 moves upward while maintaining its horizontally long posture. Then, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are brought close to each other until the bottom surface of the first sub-display device 43 in the horizontally long position and the top surface of the second sub-display device 44 in the horizontally long position face each other at a short distance. By moving the sub-display devices 43 and 44 in the vertical direction, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 6(a). In this case, the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are arranged so as to be visually continuous, and these display surfaces form one square or rectangular surface. It will be done. This position is the first juxtaposition position. In the first juxtaposition position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 exists so as to extend in the horizontal direction. Note that a detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect that each sub-display device 43, 44 is arranged in the first juxtaposed position, and the distribution control device 70, which will be described later, uses the detection result of the detection sensor. Based on this, it is determined that each sub-display device 43, 44 is arranged in the first juxtaposed position, and the drive state of the slide drive motors 45c, 46c is stopped.

In the state of FIG. 6(a), the slide drive motor 45c of the first drive unit 45 is in a drive state to move the first sub-display device 43 rightward and downward, and the rotation drive motor 45d of the first drive unit 45 is in the drive state. The first sub-display device 43 is in a driving state to rotate clockwise, and the slide drive motor 46c of the second drive unit 46 is in a driving state to move the second sub-display device 44 leftward and upward. When the rotational drive motor 46d of the drive unit 46 enters a driving state in which the second sub-display device 44 is rotated clockwise, each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is moved to the second juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. 6(b). It will be placed in the state. In the second juxtaposed position, each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is in a vertically long posture, and the left surface of the first sub-display device 43 in the vertically long posture is close to the right surface of the second sub-display device 44 in the vertically long posture. They will face each other at a distance. In this case, the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 are arranged so as to be visually continuous, and these display surfaces form one square or rectangular surface. It will be done. In the second juxtaposed position, the boundary between the display surface of the first sub-display device 43 and the display surface of the second sub-display device 44 exists so as to extend in the vertical direction. Note that a detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect that each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is placed in the second juxtaposition position, and the distribution control device 70 described later uses the detection results of the detection sensor. Based on this, it is determined that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the second juxtaposition position, and the drive states of the slide drive motors 45c and 46c and the rotation drive motors 45d and 46d are stopped. Furthermore, in addition to the first juxtaposition position and the second juxtaposition position, detection sensors (not shown) are provided for detecting the initial position and each intermediate position described below. Based on the detection results of the sensors, the driving states of the slide drive motors 45c, 46c and the rotary drive motors 45d, 46d are stopped.

In addition to the initial position, the first juxtaposition position, and the second juxtaposition position, the sub display devices 43 and 44 may be arranged at the initial position shown in FIG. 5 and the first juxtaposition position shown in FIG. 6(a). There is a position where each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is placed at an intermediate position between the installation position and the installation position. In addition, there is a position where the first sub-display device 43 moves to the right and the second sub-display device 44 moves to the left from the second juxtaposed position shown in FIG. 6(b). ing. In the case of the former, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and in the case of the latter, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 The sub-display device 44 is spaced apart from each other in the horizontal direction. Further, in a state where the first sub-display device 43 is placed at the initial position, the second sub-display device 44 corresponds to the position corresponding to the first juxtaposition position, the position corresponding to the second juxtaposition position, and each intermediate position. In addition, when the second sub-display device 44 is placed in the initial position, the first sub-display device 43 may be placed in a position corresponding to the first juxtaposition position, or in a second juxtaposition position. It may be arranged at a corresponding position and at a position corresponding to each intermediate position.

In a situation where each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at a position other than the initial position, the support members 45b and 46b are exposed from the opening 42b of the center frame 42. In this case, since these support members 45b and 46b are formed to be colorless and transparent, it is possible to make the support members 45b and 46b inconspicuous, and the image displayed on the main display device 41 is supported. It becomes possible to prevent it from being hidden by the members 45b and 46b.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 21 having the above structure. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window 51 that allows almost the entire area of the gaming area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 53 is provided above the window section 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 54 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has the function of temporarily storing the game balls put out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

A main control device 60, a distribution control device 70, and a performance control device 80 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a dispensing mechanism section including a dispensing device 68, a power supply and firing control device 65, and a dispensing control device 66. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 60>
The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. It should be noted that in the main control device 60, the board box housing the main control board 61 etc. may be provided with a trace means for leaving traces of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving traces of its opening. You can also do this. Examples of such trace means include the configuration of a joint (crimped part) that connects multiple case bodies that make up a board box inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the structure of a joint (crimped part) that requires the adhesive layer to be adhered when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing sticker that remains and leaves a trace of having been removed is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box can be considered.

The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 . The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built-in.

Note that as the ROM 63, a storage means (ie, a nonvolatile storage means) is used that allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require an external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the memory is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as the ROM 63 as long as random access is possible. Furthermore, the configuration in which the control and calculation section, ROM 63, and RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, but a configuration in which each function is installed as a separate chip may also be used, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It may also be configured so that it is installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply and launch control device 65 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power source and firing control device 65 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, a game hall or the like. Then, operating power is supplied to the main control board 61 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 61 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 66 and the production control device 80 described later.

Note that a power outage monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 62 and the power supply and launch control device 65. In this case, the occurrence of a power outage is monitored by the power outage monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power outage is confirmed, a power outage signal is sent to the MPU 62, so that the MPU 62 executes processing in case of a power outage. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As a part of the various sensors, detection is provided one-to-one for the winning ball entry parts such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 62 makes a winning determination (ball entering determination) for each ball entering portion. In addition, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winnings to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and also executes a reach occurrence lottery for each game round and a lottery for determining variable display time. do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 62 will be explained.

During the game, the MPU 62 uses various counter information to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display on the special symbol display section 37a, setting of symbol display on the main display device 41, setting of display on the general symbol display section 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a winning random number counter C1 used for jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining jackpot types such as 15R probability variable jackpot result and normal jackpot result, A reach random number counter C3 used for the reach random number lottery when the main display device 41 loses and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special figure display section 37a, and the main display device 41 A variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in . Furthermore, a general electric utility object release counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electric utility object 34a of the second operating port 34 is to be placed in an electric role open state. Note that each of these counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is provided in a lottery counter buffer 64a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold storage area 64b as an acquired information storage means when a winning occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. is stored in

The reservation storage area 64b includes a reservation area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In addition, numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as pending information in any of the pending areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, if winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of → third reservation area RE3 → fourth reservation area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. . Note that the number that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, a judgment is made as to whether the execution is correct or not.

In detail about each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and is stored in the holding storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The random number value that results in a jackpot is stored in the ROM 63 as a win/fail table. As the pass/fail table, a pass/fail table for low probability mode and a pass/fail table for high probability mode are set. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as lottery modes in the jackpot occurrence lottery means.

Under the gaming state in which the low probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 20. Note that the number of random numbers that result in the above-mentioned winning may be arbitrary as long as the probability of winning in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by "1" in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the holding storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results include (1) the mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the jackpot occurrence lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, (3) the opening/closing execution mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating three conditions, namely, the support mode in the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34.

The mode of opening/closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is such that the frequency of winnings on the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. A frequent winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the grand prize opening is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds have elapsed or a prize is entered in the grand prize opening. This continues until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the grand prize opening is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and each opening is continued until 0.2 seconds have elapsed or the number of prizes won in the grand prize opening is This continues until there are 6 pieces.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 24 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 67 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning hole is 0.2 seconds as described above. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning hole is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, winning of game balls does not substantially occur.

In addition, in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of openings and closings of the big winning opening, the opening time for one opening, and the maximum number of winnings for one opening are higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value and may be any value as long as the frequency of winnings in the special electric winning device 32 increases from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, there is a configuration in which winnings to the special electric winning device 32 do not substantially occur. It is good to do this. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the game ball firing cycle and the maximum winning number is set to be shorter than the opening time for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, The product of the firing cycle and the upper limit number of prizes may be set to be longer than the opening time. In addition, even if the firing interval of game balls and the opening time of one big prize opening are not as mentioned above, in the low-frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, it is possible to effectively Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which winnings to the special electric winning device 32 do not occur.

As for the support mode of the general utility accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared with the situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner to the gaming area PA, the normal function of the second operating port 34 is A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the electric utility object 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric utility role opening lottery using the electric utility role opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5 ), however, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric utility object 34a becomes open when the electric role open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low-frequency support mode, and one more time. The opening time is set to be long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the power utility open state is won and the power utility object 34a is opened multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery is shorter than the low-frequency support mode. is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases. When a winning occurs in the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has too much. It can be carried out.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the electric utility role per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and may include, for example, a lottery for opening electric utility objects. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric combination open state in . In addition, the secured time that is secured after one electric accessory opening lottery is held and the next electric accessory opening lottery is held (for example, in the general map display section 38a based on winnings in the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times are prepared, it is easier to select a shorter securing time in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode, or the average securing time is set to be shorter. You can leave it there. Furthermore, increasing the number of openings, lengthening the opening time, and shortening the time secured between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery (i.e. , shortening the one-time variable display time on the common map display section 38a), shortening the average time of the secured time, and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or any combination of conditions may be applied. This may increase the advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode.

The destinations to which game results are distributed to the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the ROM 63 as a distribution table. As such distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, and a 15R probability variable jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games has reached the end standard number of times (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

The explicit 2R definite variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to the jackpot state accordingly.

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the state shifts to the jackpot state accordingly.

In relation to each of the above gaming states, the normal gaming state refers to a state where the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to normal jackpot results, and "10 to 14" correspond to explicit 2R definite variable jackpot results. ``15-29'' corresponds to the 15R probability-variable jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and is stored in the holding storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the main display device 41. The expected performance is equipped with a main display device 41 capable of displaying symbols in a fluctuating manner, and in game rounds where the opening/closing execution mode of the special electric winning device 32 is the high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the fluctuating display is specially displayed. In the resulting gaming machine, after the fluctuating display of symbols on the main display device 41 is started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, the player is made to think that the fluctuating display state is likely to result in the special display result. This refers to the display state for

Two types of expected performance are set: the above-mentioned ready-to-reach performance and a preview performance for making the user expect the occurrence of a ready-to-reach performance or a special display result at a stage before the relevant ready-to-reach performance occurs.

In the reach effect, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of a high-frequency winning mode is created by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the plurality of symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the main display device 41. This includes a display state in which combinations of ready-to-win symbols that are likely to be established are displayed, and in this state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, with the combination of ready-to-reach symbols displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included.

Specifically, regarding the reach effect, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is displayed on a preset active line on the display surface of the main display device 41. A reach line is formed by stop-displaying combinations of reach-to-reach symbols that have a possibility of being established, and in a situation where the reach-to-reach line is formed, symbols are fluctuated and displayed by the final stop symbol sequence.

To specifically explain the display contents in FIG. 4, first, the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the fluctuating display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same number on lines L1 to L5, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a fluctuating display of symbols is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. By being caught, it becomes a reach performance. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbols with the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line, so that the main symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 The fluctuating display of symbols is ended.

The preview performance is performed in a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the start of the variable display of the symbols on the display surface of the main display device 41, or in a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are displayed variably in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode is included in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Also included are those in which the background image is set in a predetermined form different from the previous form, and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a predetermined form different from the previous form. Such a notice effect can occur in any game round when a reach effect is performed or when a reach effect is not performed, but it is higher when a reach effect is performed than when a reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win effect is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-reach random number counter C3 in the game round that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in game rounds that do not shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing refers to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63, and the reach random number counter C3 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. Executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform a preview effect is not made by the main control device 60 but by the distribution control device 70.

The variation type counter CS is configured such that it is incremented by "1" sequentially within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 62 to determine the variation display time on the special symbol display section 37a and the variation display time of symbols on the main display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process, which will be described later. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the special figure display section 37a and at the start of the symbol variation on the main display device 41. Note that when determining the variable display time, a variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

For example, the general utility goods release counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by "1" within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The common electric utility object release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64c at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric utility object 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric utility object opening counter C4.

As shown in FIG. 7, the output side of the MPU 62 is connected to a dispensing control device 66, as well as a power source and a firing control device 65. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 66 based on the winning determination result for the winning ball entering section. The payout control device 66 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls using the payout device 68 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 . A launch permission command is transmitted to the power supply and launch control device 65 from the main control device 60 based on the fact that the launch operation device 24 is being operated. The power supply and launch control device 65 drives the game ball launch mechanism 67 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 60.

A special figure display section 37a and a regular figure display section 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and display control of these special figure display section 37a and ordinary figure display section 38a is directly performed by the MPU62. That is, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the special figure display section 37a. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not to open the general electric utility object 34a, the MPU 62 executes display control of the ordinary electric figure display section 38a.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 62 are a special electric prize drive section that opens and closes the opening/closing door of the special electric prize winning device 32, and a general electric accessory drive section that opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34. . That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the special electric winning drive unit so that the big winning opening is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the general electric utility object 34a is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the general electric accessory drive unit so that the general electric accessory object 34a is opened and closed. Further, a distribution control device 70 is connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the distribution control device 70.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 62 will be explained. The processing of the MPU 62 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec).

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) has elapsed after the main process is started. The operation start and initial setting of the main display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function registers of the MPU 62 are set.

Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 65 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, it is determined whether the power outage flag of the RAM 64 is set to "1". Determine whether In addition, in step S106, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum, and in the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a gaming hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to step S108. Further, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly moves to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 64 is cleared. After that, the process advances to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, on condition that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 64, such as initializing a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is sent to the distribution control device 70 in order to have the current gaming state recognized. do.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S112, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the RAM 64, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing is permitted. After executing the process in step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec). First, in step S201, a power outage information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cutoff is received from the power outage monitoring board, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, a power outage process is executed.

In the following step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the random number update process for lottery, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility object opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general utility goods release counter C4, and a process was performed in which each of the read numerical information was incremented by 1. Afterwards, a process is executed to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S111, and in step S204, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S112.

In the subsequent step S205, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, a game stop flag provided in the RAM 64 is set to "1".

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes from step S207 onwards are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output to various drive units in accordance with the output information. For example, if information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the special electric prize winning drive unit is started, and if information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state is set, the corresponding Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if the information that should switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric accessory drive unit is started, and the information that should switch the general electric accessory 34a to the closed state is set. is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from each winning detection sensor are read, and the presence or absence of a winning in the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and through gate 35 is determined. Execute processing to identify.

In the following step S210, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 64. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

In the subsequent step S211, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed. In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 24 is continued, one game ball is fired every 0.6 sec, which is the predetermined firing cycle, as already explained.

In the following step S212, as an input state monitoring process, the disconnection of each winning detection sensor and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are checked based on the information read in the reading process of step S208.

In the subsequent step S213, a special figure special electric control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode. In the special figure special electric control process, when a winning occurs in the first actuation port 33 or the second actuation port 34 in a situation where the number of reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 64b is less than the upper limit number, the A process is executed in which numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 at the time is stored in the pending storage area 64b in chronological order as pending information. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, on the condition that the game is not in progress or opening/closing execution mode, and the pending information is stored, the jackpot occurrence is determined to determine whether the pending information corresponds to a jackpot winning. A lottery process and, if it corresponds to a jackpot win, a distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control processing, not only jackpot occurrence lottery processing and distribution judgment processing, but also if the pending information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, whether or not the pending information corresponds to the reach occurrence At the same time, a process of selecting a variable display time of a game session is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, a variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot win, the type of jackpot, and the presence or absence of a reach occurrence is read from the ROM 63, and based on the read variable display time table and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that timing, the current Determine the variable display time of game times. Then, a variation command containing information on the variation display time of the determined game round and a type command containing information on game results are transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and the variation of the symbols on the special figure display section 37a is sent to the distribution control device 70. Start display. As a result, one game round is started, and the performance for the game round is started on the special figure display section 37a and the main display device 41. Furthermore, when the MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command, it starts measuring the variation display time.

In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, during execution of one game round, when the variable display time corresponding to the game round has elapsed, the special figure display section 37a performs jackpot generation lottery processing and distribution for the current game round. The stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and measurement of the final display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display section 37a is maintained over the final display time. When the confirmed display time has elapsed, if the current game round corresponds to a losing result, a new game round can be started on the condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 64b. Execute processing. If the hold information is not stored, the process waits until the hold information is newly acquired.

On the other hand, if the current game round corresponds to the jackpot result, processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At this start, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that a round game is to be started is transmitted to the distribution control device 70, and a close command indicating that the round game is to be ended is transmitted to the distribution control device 70. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, an ending command indicating this is sent to the distribution control device 70, and at the same time, a jackpot occurrence lottery mode or support mode is set after the opening/closing execution mode. Execute the process. In the opening/closing execution mode, an opening period occurs over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and during this opening period, an effect is executed that allows the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred. After that, a round game in which the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed is executed a predetermined number of times. Then, after a predetermined number of round games have been executed, an ending period occurs over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and during this ending period, an effect is performed that allows the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

After executing the special figure special electric line control process in step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the general figure general electric line control process is executed in step S214. In the general map and general electric power control process, when a prize is won in the through gate 35, a process is executed to obtain the reservation information on the general electrician side, and when the reservation information on the general electrician side is stored. Then, a release determination is made regarding the pending information, and further, using the release determination as a trigger, a process for performing a production for a regular map is executed. Further, based on the result of the open determination, a process for opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information corresponding to the special figure display section 37a on the special figure pending display section 37b. At the same time, output information is set to reflect the increase or decrease in the number of pending information corresponding to the general figure display section 38a on the ordinary figure reservation display section 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information for updating the display content of the special figure display section 37a is set, and the display content of the regular figure display section 38a is updated. Configure the output information for updating.

In the subsequent step S216, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 66 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result. Further, in step S217, a payout output process is executed to set the prize ball command as an output target. In the following step S218, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. Thereafter, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Distribution control device 70>
Next, the distribution control device 70 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 7, the distribution control device 70 executes effects on the various display devices 41, 43, 44, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 based on commands received from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60. Based on the control of the distribution control board 71 having the function of determining the content, the distribution control board 71 and the production control device 80 described later, the various drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 The output integrated board 72 has a function of collectively outputting drive signals.

The distribution control board 71 includes an MPU 73. The MPU 73 includes a ROM 74 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 73, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 74. It has a built-in RAM 75, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

Note that as the ROM 74, a storage means (ie, a nonvolatile storage means) is used that allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require an external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the memory is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as the ROM 74 as long as random access is possible. Furthermore, the configuration in which the control and calculation section, ROM 74, and RAM 75 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and a configuration in which each function is installed as a separate chip may also be used, and some functions may be implemented as separate chips. It may also be configured so that it is installed.

The MPU 73 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 73. A production control device 80 is connected to the output side of the MPU 73, and an output integrated board 72 is also connected thereto. Incidentally, the electrical connection between the distribution control board 71 and the output integration board 72 is through a distribution side connector 76a provided on the distribution control board 71 and an output integration side connector 76b provided on the output integration board 72. This is done by connecting without intervening signal lines. The distribution side connector 76a and the output integration side connector 76b are electrically connected in a removable manner.

The output integrated board 72 includes a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78. The motor drive circuit 77 includes a slide drive motor 45c and a rotary drive motor 45d for moving the first sub-display device 43, and a second sub-display device based on drive data output from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71. This is a circuit for outputting a drive signal to a slide drive motor 46c and a rotation drive motor 46d for moving the slider 44. The MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 outputs drive data corresponding to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d to the motor drive circuit 77 at respective timings. The motor drive circuit 77 is individually electrically connected to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d, and selects the drive motor 45c corresponding to the drive data received from the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71. , 45d, 46c, and 46d are individually driven and controlled.

A harness connector 78 is provided at an intermediate position on an electrical path for outputting signals from the motor drive circuit 77 to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d. In addition, the harness connector 78 is provided as an electrical path for outputting a signal from a light emitting circuit 87 provided on a production control board 81 of a production control device 80 to be described later to the display light emitting section 53, and also provided on the production control board 81. The sound output circuit 88 is located in the middle of an electrical path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker unit 54 . As already explained, each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d is mounted on the game board 21, and the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 are mounted on the front door frame 14. Signal lines for outputting signals to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 are all relayed by a relay board provided on the game board 21. In this case, each of these signal lines is provided as a harness in which one end is integrated into one connector member and the other end is also integrated into one connector member. One end of the harness is removably electrically connected to the harness connector 78 of the output integrated board 72, and the other end of the harness is removably connected to the harness connector provided on the relay board. electrically connected.

As will be described in detail later, the light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output control of the speaker section 54 are performed by the production control device 80. In this case, the signal line for outputting a signal to the display light emitting section 53 and the signal line for outputting a signal to the speaker section 54 are the signal line for outputting a signal to each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d. In addition, since the outputs are integrated into the output integrated board 72, it becomes necessary to remove the electrical connections between each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, display light emitting section 53, and speaker section 54 and the control device side during maintenance or the like. In this case, the work areas are concentrated on the output integrated board 72, making it possible to improve the work efficiency.

Further, each signal line for outputting signals to each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, the display light emitting section 53, and the speaker section 54 is consolidated into one harness, and is provided at one end of the harness. The connector member is connected to a harness connector 78 of an output integrated board 72. In this case, by removing the harness from the harness connector 78, the electrical connections between each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, display light emitting section 53, and speaker section 54 and the control device side can be released all at once. This also makes it possible to improve workability during maintenance and the like.

An electrical path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 to the display light emitting section 53 and an electrical path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker section 54 are electrical paths formed on the distribution control board 71. Although it is configured to be connected to the harness connector 78 through an electric circuit formed on the circuit and output integrated board 72, the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 is not interposed in these electrical paths. As a result, in a configuration in which the distribution control device 70 is interposed in the electrical path for outputting signals to the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54, the light emitting circuit 87 and the sound output circuit are provided in the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54. It becomes possible to prevent the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 from intervening in the processing for outputting signals from the distribution control board 88. Note that an electrical path for outputting a signal from the light emitting circuit 87 to the display light emitting section 53 and an electric path for outputting a signal from the sound output circuit 88 to the speaker section 54 are formed on the distribution control board 71. A configuration may also be adopted in which no electric circuit is included.

As described above, the distribution control device 70 is provided with not only the distribution control board 71 but also the output integration board 72, and these distribution control board 71 and output integration board 72 are connected to the distribution side connector 76a and the output integration side connector. It is electrically connected in a removable state using 76b. The output integrated board 72 is provided with a motor drive circuit 77 and a harness connector 78. As a result, if it becomes necessary to vary the presence or absence of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, 46d, or increase or decrease in number between models, 54 needs to be different between models, it is only necessary to change the configuration of the output integrated board 72 between the models, and the configuration of the distribution control board 71 and the production control device 80 can be changed between the models. (excluding program and data configurations) can be used as is between these models.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 73 of the distribution control board 71 will be explained. In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, and the MPU 73, ROM 74, and RAM 75 of the distribution control board 71 are referred to as the distribution side. They are referred to as an MPU 73, a distribution side ROM 74, and a distribution side RAM 75.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) by the distribution side MPU 73.

First, in step S301, a table setting process is executed to set a control table used for controlling the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d and controlling the production control device 80. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table for performing processing corresponding to a command received from the main MPU 62 is set. In the following step S302, the contents of the display control of each display device 41, 43, 44, the contents of the light emission control of the display light emitting section 53, and the contents of the sound output control of the speaker section 54 are set for the effect provided in the effect control device 80. A command selection process for instructing the CPU 82 is executed. In the command selection process, commands are output to the performance CPU 82 in accordance with the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301.

Thereafter, in step S303, a movable object control process is executed to control the drive of each drive motor 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d. In the movable object control process, drive control of each of the drive motors 45c, 45d, 46c, and 46d is executed according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301. After that, pointer update processing is executed in step S304. In the pointer update process, the pointer information in the current control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

If the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 62 (step S401: YES), storage processing of game results is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the results of the jackpot occurrence lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 62 at the start of the current game round are identified, and the results are identified. The information is written to the RAM 64.

Thereafter, on the condition that the variable display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main MPU 62 is the variable display time corresponding to the situation in which the preview effect can occur (step S403: YES), the preview lottery process is executed. (Step S404). In the preview lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not a preview performance will be performed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 in the current game round. As already explained, such a preview performance is performed in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a varying manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the fluctuating display of symbols has started on the main display device 41, or in a situation where the symbols are being displayed in a varying manner in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a character is displayed on one of the display devices 41, 43, 44 separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It also includes those that make the background screen a predetermined form different from the previous form, and those that make the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 a predetermined form different from the previous form. This notice effect can occur in any game round when a reach effect is performed or when a reach effect is not performed, but the performance is higher when a reach effect is performed than when a reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, preview effects are more likely to occur in game sessions that correspond to a jackpot result than in game sessions that correspond to a winning result, and furthermore, preview effects that appear less often in game sessions that correspond to a jackpot result. is set so that it is more likely to occur.

In the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice lottery table stored in advance in the distribution side ROM 74 is read out to the distribution side RAM 75. The preview lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with combinations of variation commands and type commands. Then, a value is obtained from the advance notice lottery counter provided to be updated periodically in the distribution side RAM 75, and information on the advance notice lottery result corresponding to the acquired value is obtained from the advance notice lottery table read out this time. Identify.

If a negative determination is made in step S403, or if the process in step S404 is executed, the variable display time corresponding to the variable command received this time from the main MPU 62 must be the variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect. Under the condition (step S405: YES), a reach effect lottery process is executed (step S406). In other words, if the variable display time of the game round determined by the main MPU 62 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach effect, the type of reach effect to be executed is determined in the reach effect lottery process, and the main side MPU 62 If the variable display time of the game round determined in does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

As already explained, the reach effect corresponds to the occurrence of a high-frequency winning mode by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41. A display state is included in which a combination of ready-to-win symbols that has a possibility of forming a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed, and in this state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, while displaying the combination of ready-to-reach symbols as described above, the symbols can be displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows, and the background images and predetermined characters can be displayed as moving images on the sub-display devices 43 and 44. After displaying a ready-to-reach effect or a combination of ready-to-reach symbols in a reduced size or non-display, a predetermined display is displayed on substantially the entire display surface of the main display device 41 and substantially the entire display surface of each sub-display device 43, 44. This includes those that create a reach effect by displaying characters, etc. as videos. This reach effect is more likely to occur in game rounds that correspond to any jackpot result than in game rounds that correspond to a miss result, and furthermore, the reach effect has a lower occurrence rate in game rounds that correspond to a jackpot result. It is set so that it is more likely to occur.

In the ready-to-win lottery process, the ready-to-win lottery table stored in advance in the distribution side ROM 74 is read out to the distribution side RAM 75. The reach lottery table is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, the value is acquired from the reach lottery counter provided to be updated periodically in the distribution side RAM 75, and the reach lottery table from which the information of the reach effect lottery result corresponding to the acquired value is read this time Specify from

If a negative determination is made in step S405, or if the process in step S406 is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one active line L1 to L5. The information is determined as the current stop result information. In this case, the same combination of odd symbols is selected for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, while the same combination of even symbols can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result. Note that the active lines L1 to L5 on which the same symbol combinations are stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the active lines L1 to L5, and one active line L1 ~The information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1") is established on L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a winning result, the presence or absence of a reach effect is determined from the contents of the combination of the variation command and the type command. When a reach effect occurs, the combination of the same symbols on all active lines L1 to L5 and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols are stopped, and the result is a stop result on one or two active lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if the reach effect does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols on all active lines L1 to L5 and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols are not established, and the reach effect occurs on all active lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

After that, a control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the control pattern table setting process, the result of the preview lottery process (step S404), whether or not a reach effect occurs, if the reach effect occurs, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S406), and the stop symbol determination process ( The control pattern table corresponding to the combination resulting from step S407) is read from the distribution side ROM 74 and stored in the distribution side RAM 75.

Thereafter, a variable display time determination process is executed (step S409). In this process, the information on the variable display time of the current game round is specified from the content of the variable command currently received from the main side MPU 62, and the information on the specified variable display time is stored in the allocation side RAM 75. set in the variable time counter. The variable time counter is a counter for specifying the timing at which the distribution side MPU 73 ends the variable display of symbols on the main display device 41 and starts the fixed display of the symbols in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated in the distribution side MPU 73, that is, each time 4 msec elapses.

In a situation where the performance execution is controlled according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), the value of the variable time counter in the distribution side RAM 75 set in step S409 is If it is "0" (step S411: YES), information on the confirmed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the confirmed time counter provided in the distribution side RAM 75 (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated in the distribution side MPU 73, that is, each time 4 msec elapses. Thereafter, a final display start command is sent to the effect CPU 82 (step S413). As a result, in the performance CPU 82, each symbol that is being displayed on standby on the main display device 41 is displayed as it is, and the displayed state continues for a fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 seconds). The display on the main display device 41 is controlled so that the main display device 41 is maintained.

Note that in the table setting process, in addition to the above-mentioned processes, other processes are executed in step S414. In other processes, for example, when an opening command is received from the main MPU 62, a control pattern table for executing the opening/closing mode effect is read, and when an ending command is received from the main MPU 62, executes processing to end the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, in a situation where neither the performance for the game round nor the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, a control pattern table for executing the demonstration display performance is read out.

<Production control device 80>
Next, the production control device 80 will be explained. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the production control device 80.

The production control device 80 is a production control device equipped with a production CPU 82, a memory module 83, a work memory 84, a production LSI 85, a VRAM 86, and the light emission circuit 87 and sound output circuit 88 that have already been described. A substrate 81 is provided.

The performance CPU 82 has a function as a main control unit in the performance control device 80, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the performance CPU 82 is electrically connected to the distribution side MPU 73, and various commands sent from the distribution side MPU 73 are input to the performance CPU 82. The production CPU 82 is electrically connected to a memory module 83 and a work memory 84 via an external bus 89, and executes programs and various data stored in the memory module 83 based on commands received from the distribution side MPU 73. A transfer instruction is given to transfer the data to the work memory 84. Furthermore, the performance CPU 82 is electrically connected to the performance LSI 85 via an external bus 89, and outputs image signals to each display device 41, 43, 44 based on commands received from the distribution side MPU 73. A light emission instruction is issued to cause the light emission circuit 87 to output drive data for light emission, and a sound output instruction is issued to cause the sound output circuit 88 to output drive data for sound output. Note that the main display device 41 displays a two-dimensional image (2D image) or a three-dimensional image (3D image), and also displays an image in which these two-dimensional images and three-dimensional images are integrated. Further, each sub-display device 43, 44 does not display a three-dimensional image, but only a two-dimensional image.

The work memory 84 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 83, and also temporarily storing flags and the like. The work memory 84 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply to maintain memory, and specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The work memory 84 requires faster data reading speed than the memory module 83. In addition, although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the production control device 80 is executed well. Further, the work memory 84 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred to the work memory 84 from the memory module 83 based on a data transfer instruction from the performance CPU 82 to the memory module 83. Specifically, all control data such as programs and data used by the performance CPU 82 are read out to the work memory 84 when the supply of operating power to the performance CPU 82 is started. Then, the performance CPU 82 reads the control data transferred to the work memory 84 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The memory module 83 stores in advance control data including a control program and fixed value data, and also stores in advance various image data for displaying images on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. The memory module 83 includes a nonvolatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply to retain memory. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the production control device 80 is executed well. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 83 is used as a non-writing, read-only memory (ROM).

The various image data stored in the memory module 83 include image data for 2D images such as sprite data such as designs and characters displayed on each display device 41, 43, and 44, background data, and moving image data. include. The various image data stored in the memory module 83 also include object data such as characters displayed on the main display device 41, and image data for 3D images such as texture data pasted to the object data. It is.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the external shape and pattern of the character, and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. Further, the background data is stored and held as JPEG format data that is compressed still image data. The moving image data will be explained in detail later.

Further, object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. Further, a polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of three-dimensional coordinate vertices. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, orientation and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

Texture data is image data that is pasted to each polygon of object data. By pasting texture data to object data, an image corresponding to the object data, such as a display image containing a design or character, is generated. Ru. The texture data can be held in any manner, but includes at least a combination of bitmap format data and color palette data that is referenced when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image.

In addition to the control data and various image data used by the performance CPU 82, the memory module 83 also receives light emission data for causing the display light emitting section 53 to emit light according to a predetermined pattern, and predetermined data from the speaker section 54. Sound output data for causing sound output is stored in advance. The light emission data is data in which luminance data corresponding to a time-series lighting pattern is compressed using a predetermined compression technique, and is read out from the memory module 83 when light emission control is executed in the production LSI 85. A decoding process is executed on the light emission data, and the data expanded by the decoding process is used. The sound output data is data in which sound data corresponding to a time-series sound output pattern is compressed using a predetermined compression technique, and is read from the memory module 83 when sound output control is executed in the performance LSI 85. A decoding process is executed on the sound output data, and the data expanded by the decoding process is used.

The VRAM 86 outputs various data necessary for causing the display light emitting section 53 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, various data necessary for outputting sound from the speaker section 54, and images to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. This is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for The VRAM 86 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply to retain memory, and specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the present invention is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAMs such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. The VRAM 86 requires a faster data reading speed than the memory module 83. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the production control device 80 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the VRAM 86 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The effect LSI 85 has a function of drawing on each display device 41, 43, 44 using the image data read out to the VRAM 86 based on a drawing instruction from the effect CPU 82, and a function of drawing on each display device 41, 43, 44 based on a light emission instruction from the effect CPU 82. , a function of controlling the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 using data read out into the LSI 85 for presentation and expanded by decoding processing, and a function of controlling the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 using data read out in the LSI 85 for presentation and developed in the LSI 85 for presentation based on sound output instructions from the CPU 82 for presentation. It has a function of controlling the sound output of the speaker section 54 using the data that is output and developed through decoding processing.

In detail, the production LSI 85 includes an I/F 91, a transfer controller 92, a register 93, a pre-transfer control section 94, a video decoder 95, a 2D control section 96, a 3D control section 97, and a first display. It includes a circuit 98, a second display circuit 99, a light emission decoder 101, a light emission control section 102, a sound decoder 103, and a sound output control section 104. These circuits 91 to 104 are connected to each other via an internal bus 105, and the internal bus 105 is connected to an external bus 89 via an I/F 91.

The transfer controller 92 executes data transfer based on transfer instructions from the advance transfer control section 94, 2D control section 96, 3D control section 97, light emission control section 102, and sound output control section 104. Specifically, data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the register 93 of the presentation LSI 85, and data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86. It also reads data from the VRAM 86. Note that the register 93 requires a faster data reading speed than the memory module 83.

The advance transfer control unit 94 transfers image data necessary when creating one frame worth of drawing data in the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 based on the drawing list transmitted from the performance CPU 82 and stored in the register 93. issues a transfer instruction to the transfer controller 92 so that it is read into the VRAM 86 by the time the drawing process is executed. Thereby, the image data necessary for executing drawing in the 2D control section 96 and 3D control section 97 is in a state where it has been read into the VRAM 86 in advance.

The video decoder 95 executes decoding processing of the video data transferred to the VRAM 86. Although the details will be described later, a plurality of decoded image data (2D still image data) are created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data, and the plurality of decoded image data are developed in the register 93. . The decoded image data developed in this register 93 is used when the 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 execute drawing processing.

The 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 execute processing by a control program according to the drawing list transmitted from the performance CPU 82 and stored in the register 93. Note that all of the control programs for operating the 2D control section 96 and 3D control section 97 may be provided by a drawing list, and a memory storing control programs in advance may be built into the LSI 85 for effect, and the control program may be provided by a drawing list. The 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 may perform predetermined processing depending on the content of the drawing list. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 83 in advance.

When drawing processing is executed in the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97, drawing data for one frame is created in the VRAM 86 using (or by processing) the image data read into the VRAM 86. One frame's worth of drawing data is data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface of each display device 41, 43, 44 is updated at a predetermined update timing. It refers to Although the details will be described later, the VRAM 86 is provided with two frame areas for each of the main display device 41 and the sub display devices 43 and 44 as areas for creating drawing data for one frame. Each frame area is set to have a capacity that allows the corresponding display devices 41, 43, and 44 to store one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each frame area includes a large number of unit areas each corresponding to the dots (pixels) of each display device 41, 43, and 44 at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) for each dot. Correspondingly, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to a full-color system; for example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Incidentally, the 3D control section 97 has a geometry calculation section and a rendering section. The geometry calculation unit places object data designated as a placement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 93. Furthermore, the geometry calculation unit executes various coordinate transformation processes when and after placing the object data in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is finally clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface. The rendering unit projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data based on the drawing list stored in the register 93, and pastes texture data to create two-dimensional data. Create drawing data for one frame.

Since two frame areas are provided for each of the main display device 41 and the sub display devices 43 and 44, for example, drawing data created in one frame area for the main display device 41 can be used to display the relevant image. In a situation where drawing on the main display device 41 is being executed, drawing data to be used in the future in the other frame area of the main display device 41 is created. In other words, a double buffer method is adopted for the frame area.

The first display circuit 98 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the main display device 41 based on drawing data created in one frame region to be output out of two frame regions corresponding to the main display device 41. is generated and outputs the image signal to the main display device 41. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame area to be output to the first display circuit 98. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) and converted into gradation data so that it corresponds to the resolution of the main display device 41. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot on the main display device 41 is generated and output.

The second display circuit 99 controls each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 based on the drawing data created in one frame region to be output out of the two frame regions corresponding to each sub display device 43 and 44. An image signal corresponding to the dot is generated, and the image signal is output to each sub-display device 43, 44. Specifically, drawing data is transferred from the frame area to be output to the second display circuit 99. The transferred image data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) and converted into gradation data so that it corresponds to the resolution of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is generated and output.

The light emission decoder 101, based on the light emission instruction from the production CPU 82, collects light emission data necessary for executing light emission control at a predetermined timing in the light emission control unit 102 until the timing for executing the light emission control is reached. A transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 so that the data is read out into the VRAM 86. Further, the light emitting decoder 101 reads out the light emitting data previously transferred to the VRAM 86 and executes decoding processing on the light emitting data to create expanded brightness data, and the created brightness data after being expanded. is stored in the register 93. As a result, the luminance data after the expansion of the light emission data is stored in the register 93 by the time the predetermined timing is reached.

The light emission control unit 102 outputs the brightness data developed in the register 93 to the light emission circuit 87 based on a light emission instruction from the performance CPU 82. As a result, a signal according to the brightness data is output from the light emitting circuit 87, and the display light emitting section 53 enters a light emitting state in a manner according to the brightness data.

The sound decoder 103 uses the sound output data required when the sound output control section 104 executes the sound output control at a predetermined timing based on the sound output instruction from the production CPU 82 to execute the sound output control. A transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 so that the data is read into the VRAM 86 by the time the timing is reached. Further, the sound decoder 103 reads the sound output data previously transferred to the VRAM 86 and performs decoding processing on the sound output data to create sound data after development, and the created sound data after development. is stored in the register 93. As a result, the sound data after the expansion of the sound output data is stored in the register 93 by the time the predetermined timing is reached.

The sound output control unit 104 outputs the sound data developed in the register 93 to the sound output circuit 88 based on a sound output instruction from the performance CPU 82. As a result, a signal according to the sound data is output from the sound output circuit 88, and sound is output from the speaker section 54 in a manner according to the sound data.

<Processing configuration of the production CPU 82>
Next, the processing executed by the performance CPU 82 will be explained. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process which is repeatedly activated by the performance CPU 82 at a predetermined period, specifically, at a period of 20 msec.

Note that when the first display circuit 98 outputs an image signal for one frame to the main display device 41, it starts outputting the image signal from a dot located at the upper left corner of the display surface, and starts outputting the image signal from a dot located at the upper left corner of the display surface, and Image signals are sequentially output to the dots arranged on the line, and image signals are output to the dots from left to right in order from the top to each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output to the dot at the lower right corner of the display screen. When the second display circuit 99 outputs one frame worth of image signals to the sub-display devices 43 and 44, it starts outputting the image signals from a dot in the upper left corner of each display surface, and An image signal is sequentially outputted to the dots lined up on a horizontal line included in the image, and an image signal is outputted sequentially from the top to the right dots for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output to the dot at the lower right corner of the display screen. In this case, the presentation LSI 85 outputs a V interrupt signal to the presentation CPU 82 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot of each display device 41, 43, 44 to update the image of one frame. The presentation CPU 82 is made to recognize that the process has been completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of one frame's worth of images. In this respect, the V interrupt processing can also be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V-interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V-interrupt process was activated, a new V-interrupt process is activated.

In the V interrupt processing, first, command analysis processing is executed (step S501). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer provided in the work memory 84 is analyzed. Here, when the performance CPU 82 receives a strobe signal from the distribution side MPU 73, it executes the command interrupt process regardless of what process is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt processing, the command received from the distribution side MPU 73 is transferred to the command buffer of the work memory 84.

Thereafter, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving a new command (step S502: YES), command correspondence processing is executed (step S503). In the command correspondence process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 83. The execution target tables include a table for executing display control of each display device 41, 43, and 44, a table for executing light emission control of the display light emitting section 53, and a table for executing sound output control of the speaker section 54. There is a table for . In the execution target table for display control, when displaying a video corresponding to a received command on the display screen of each display device 41, 43, 44, the execution target table includes information for displaying one frame worth of images at each image update timing. The contents of the necessary processing are determined. The execution target table for light emission control defines the contents of processing necessary to cause the display light emitting unit 53 to perform light emission at each light emission control timing when the display light emitting unit 53 executes light emission according to a light emission pattern corresponding to a received command. ing. The execution target table for sound output control includes information necessary for causing the speaker unit 54 to output sound at each sound output control timing when the speaker unit 54 outputs sound according to a sound output pattern corresponding to a received command. The content of processing is determined.

The commands that the production CPU 82 receives from the distribution side MPU 73 include a command to start variation, a command to start preview production, a command to start normal reach, a command to start super reach, a command to start final display, a command to start notification, and a command to start normal reach. There are notification cancellation commands, etc. When these commands are received, an execution target table necessary for each display device 41, 43, 44, display light emitting unit 53, and speaker unit 54 to execute the effect or notification corresponding to each command is read.

If a negative determination is made in step S502 or if the process in step S503 is executed, task processing for light emission control (step S504), task processing for sound output control (step S505), and task processing for display control (step S506) is executed.

In the task processing for light emission control, by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table that is set to be used for light emission control, the effect is created to realize the light emission mode corresponding to the current instruction timing. Various data necessary for instructing the LSI 85 to emit light are set. Specifically, the various data include address information of the area where the light emitting data is stored in the memory module 83 and the address information of the area in the register 93 when it is the timing to instruct execution of the decoding process of the light emitting data. Address information of the area to which the light emitting data is transferred, information for instructing the light emitting decoder 101 to decode the light emitting data, etc. are present. In addition, if this is the timing to instruct the change of the light emitting mode of the display light emitting section 53, the above various data includes an area in which data to be used among the light emitting data developed in the register 93 is stored. address information etc.

In task processing for sound output control, the sound output mode corresponding to the current instruction timing is realized by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table that is set to be used for sound output control. For this purpose, various data necessary for issuing a sound output instruction to the production LSI 85 are set. Specifically, the various data include address information of the area where the sound output data is stored in the memory module 83 and the register 93 if this is the timing to instruct execution of the decoding process of the sound output data. Address information of the area to which the sound output data is transferred, information for instructing the sound decoder 103 to decode the sound output data, etc. are present in the area. Furthermore, if this is the timing to instruct a change in the sound output mode of the speaker unit 54, the data to be used from among the sound output data developed in the register 93 is stored in the various data described above. Contains area address information, etc.

In task processing for display control, one frame of image corresponding to the current instruction timing is displayed by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table that is set to be used for display control. For this purpose, various data necessary for instructing the rendering LSI 85 to draw is set. Specifically, the various data include address information of the area where the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 83, information about the frame area of the target where drawing data is to be created using the image data to be controlled, and control. There is information on the coordinates when writing the target image data, information on the scale when writing the image data, information on the uniform α value (translucent value) when writing the image data, etc.

After that, list output processing is executed (step S507). In the list output process, a light emission list for setting a light emission mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, a sound output list for setting a sound output mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time, and a sound output list for setting a sound output mode corresponding to the instruction timing of the current processing time. Each of the drawing lists for displaying one frame worth of images corresponding to the instruction timing is created, and the various lists created are sent to the LSI 85 for presentation. In this case, in the light emission list, the light emission data grasped in the immediately preceding task processing for light emission control is set as the target of use. The light emitting decoder 101 of the presentation LSI 85 decodes the light emission data according to the light emission list, and the light emission control unit 102 of the presentation LSI 85 outputs the light emission data to the light emission circuit 87 according to the light emission list. Furthermore, in the sound output list, data for sound output that was grasped in the previous task processing for sound output control is set as a target for use. The sound decoder 103 of the performance LSI 85 decodes the sound output data according to the sound output list, and the sound output control unit 104 of the performance LSI 85 causes the sound output circuit 88 to perform sound output data according to the sound output list. Output data. In addition, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately previous display control task process is to be drawn, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 of the presentation LSI 85 create drawing data in the frame area of the VRAM 86 according to this drawing list. Processing in the 2D control section 96 and 3D control section 97 will be explained in detail later.

The task processing for display control in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15.

First, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S601). In the setting process for starting control, based on the currently set execution target table for display control, a process for setting an individual image for which control (calculation) is newly started in the production CPU 82 in this processing time. Execute. Note that an individual image refers to a 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for a design and image data for a back surface, or a 2D image defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. It is a 3D image.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting control, first, based on the currently set execution target table for display control, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image that is the target for starting control in this processing round. do. If it exists, the work memory 84 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations when controlling the individual image, and one-to-one data is applied to the individual image that is recognized as the control start target. Allocate free buffer space accordingly. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S602). This control update target is an individual image for which the setting process for starting control has been completed and that is likely to be included in one frame of images after the current processing time.

Thereafter, background arithmetic processing is executed (step S603). In the background arithmetic processing, if the backmost image that forms the background image or a 2D background character image is used, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, and uniform α value on a virtual two-dimensional plane are calculated. Various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list, such as α data specification, etc., is calculated and derived. On the other hand, in the background calculation process, if the background image is the backmost image that constitutes the background image, or if it is a 3D image of the background character, the coordinates in the world coordinate system, rotation angle, scale, brightness, etc. The process calculates and derives various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list, such as light information for attaching images, camera information for projecting, and Z test designation.

After that, arithmetic processing for presentation is executed (step S604). In the calculation processing for performance, processing is executed to calculate and derive the various parameters described above for individual images to be displayed in various performances such as reach performance, preview performance, and jackpot performance. Further, when performing various notifications, processing for calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for individual images to be displayed.

Thereafter, symbol calculation processing is executed (step S605). In the symbol arithmetic processing, among the symbols that are subject to variable display in each game, the current control update target is grasped. Furthermore, the various parameter information described above is derived for the identified control update target.

Incidentally, in each process of steps S603 to S605, a process of updating the control start parameters set in step S601 is executed. Furthermore, in each process from step S603 to step S605, animation data is used that is set to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image is updated. This animation data is determined depending on the type of individual image. Further, the animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 83, and is transferred in advance to the work memory 84 by the time it is necessary to read it out in the performance CPU 82.

Thereafter, a process of grasping the drawing instruction target is executed (step S606). In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, one frame of the image corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction is selected from among the individual images that have become control update targets through the calculation processes in steps S603, S604, and S605. Execute processing to understand the individual images included. This understanding is performed by performing predetermined calculations with reference to information on coordinates, rotation angles, and scales of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images for which control has started, but only the individual images to be displayed, so that the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 can control the individual images to be displayed. There is no need to select the individual images, and even if the individual images are not selected, there is no need to wastefully perform drawing processing on individual images that are not to be displayed. This reduces the processing load on the 2D control section 96 and 3D control section 97. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the individual images to be controlled in the production CPU 82 and the individual images to be controlled in the 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 are the same. In this case, there is no need to execute the process of step S606.

The content of displaying 2D images and 3D images using a drawing list created based on the results of task processing for display control will be described.

When an image is displayed on the main display device 41, a background image is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on the back side, and when a predetermined display effect occurs, the background image is displayed in front of the background image. A performance image such as a game character is displayed, and furthermore, in the case of a game replay, a symbol image is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed in front of the background image and the performance image. . In this case, the background image and the effect image are displayed as 3D images based on the execution of drawing processing by the 3D control unit 97, and the pattern images are displayed as 2D images based on the execution of the drawing processing by the 2D control unit 96. Therefore, as a drawing list for displaying images on the main display device 41, drawing instructions are given using a 3D drawing list for displaying 3D images for background images and effect images, and drawing instructions for 2D images are given for pattern images. A drawing instruction is given using a 2D drawing list for display. As for image display on the main display device 41, realistic image display is possible by displaying 3D images for background images and effect images, while reducing processing load by displaying 2D images for pattern images. becomes possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a 3D image is displayed for the background image, a 2D image is displayed for the effect image and the pattern image, and a 3D image is displayed for the background image and the pattern image. The configuration may be such that a 2D image is displayed for the effect image, a 2D image is displayed for the background image and the effect image, and a 3D image is displayed for the pattern image.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the register 93 used when the 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 execute drawing processing. As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a main display drawing area 111 as an area used for displaying an image on the main display device 41. The main display drawing area 111 includes a 2D drawing area 112 in which drawing data for displaying a pattern image as a 2D image on the main display device 41 is created, and a background image and a production image on the main display device 41 as a 3D image. A 3D drawing area 113 is provided in which drawing data for displaying the 3D drawing area 113 is created. Further, the main display drawing area 111 is provided with a first main frame area 114 and a second main frame area 115. The first frame area for main 114 and the second frame area for main 115 each have a main display device by combining the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113. One frame worth of drawing data to be displayed on the screen 41 is created. In this case, in a situation where drawing data created in one of the first main frame area 114 and the second main frame area 115 is used to draw on the main display device 41, the other frame area Drawing data to be used in the future for the frame area is created.

On the other hand, when an image is displayed on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, the background image is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on the back side, and a predetermined display effect is displayed. If this occurs, a performance image such as a performance character is displayed in front of the background image. In this case, these background images and effect images are displayed as 2D images. That is, although 2D images are displayed on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, 3D images are not displayed. Therefore, regarding the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, a drawing instruction based on the 3D drawing list is not given, but a drawing instruction is given based on the 2D drawing list. In displaying images on each sub-display device 43, 44, only a 2D image is used without using a 3D image, so that not only the main display device 41 but also each sub-display device 43, 44 are provided. In this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying images on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44.

As shown in FIG. 16, the register 93 is provided with a sub-display drawing area 116 as an area used for displaying images on the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. The sub-display drawing area 116 is provided with a first sub-frame area 117 and a second sub-frame area 118. In each of the first sub-frame area 117 and the second sub-frame area 118, the 2D control unit 96 creates drawing data for displaying the background image and effect image as 2D images on each sub display device 43, 44. be done. Further, although the details will be described later, each of the first sub frame area 117 and the second sub frame area 118 contains drawing data and second Drawing data for displaying one frame's worth of images on the sub-display device 44 is created as a total of the drawing data. In this case, drawing data created in one of the first sub frame area 117 and the second sub frame area 118 is used to draw on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44. In the running situation, drawing data to be used in the future for the other frame area is created.

As described above, both a 2D image and a 3D image can be simultaneously displayed as an image for one frame on the main display device 41, and a 2D image is displayed as an image for one frame on each sub display device 43, 44. , each time the image for one frame is updated, the image for one frame is updated in each of the main display device 41 and each of the sub display devices 43 and 44, and the image for each one frame at the image update timing is updated. A combination of at least one 2D drawing list and at least one 3D drawing list is provided from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 for updating. That is, by completing the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96 for at least one 2D drawing list and the drawing process by the 3D control unit 97 for at least one 3D drawing list, each display device 41, 43, 44 The creation of drawing data for one frame of images is completed.

Next, a 2D drawing list for displaying a 2D image will be described with reference to explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17(a) to 17(c).

Header information is set in the 2D drawing list. The header information is set with target buffer information, which is information indicating in which frame area 114, 115, 117, 118 the drawing data for displaying the image corresponding to the 2D drawing list is to be drawn. There is. Specifically, information indicating in which of the first main frame area 114 and the second main frame area 115 the drawing data for displaying the image on the main display device 41 is to be drawn is set. , information indicating in which of the first sub frame area 117 and the second sub frame area 118 the drawing data for displaying an image on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is to be drawn is set. Further, various designation information is set in the header information.

In addition to the above header information, the 2D drawing list includes frame areas 114, 115, 117, 118 of each image data as information corresponding to multiple types of image data used to display one frame of image. Information on display order priority data indicating the drawing order for each image data, parameter information for each image data, and address information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored are set. In detail, the display order priority data information is set to be serial number numerical information, and the combination of parameter information and address information is set in one-to-one correspondence to each numerical information. .

The display order priority data is set so that in one frame of images, individual images that are desired to be displayed at the back of the display screen are drawn first. Note that the individual image refers to one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as pattern sprite data. In the 2D drawing list shown in FIG. 17A, background data is set as the first drawing target, sprite data A is set as second, sprite data B is third, and so on. Therefore, background data is first written into the frame area to be drawn, then sprite data A is written so as to overlap with the background data, and then sprite data B is written.

A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P(0), P(1), P(2), . . . . Specifically, regarding the background data parameter P(0), as shown in FIG. 17(b), it indicates the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane (frame areas 114, 115, 117, 118) when writing the background data. Coordinate information, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and magnification when writing to the frame area with respect to the size set as the initial state of the background data. Information on the scale to be displayed, information on the uniform α value that indicates the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background data, and information on the α data specification that indicates whether or not α data is applied and to which it is applied are set. There is. The types of parameters described above are the same for sprite data A, as shown in FIG. 17(c).

The coordinate information is not set individually for all pixels constituting the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one piece of image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. The 2D control unit 96 can recognize that the specified coordinate information is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when arranging the image data, the one pixel at the center will be on the specified coordinates. Do it like this. This makes it possible to suppress the information capacity (that is, the amount of data) of coordinate information that should be specified for one piece of image data in the performance CPU 82. Furthermore, since it is not necessary for the production LSI 85 to be able to recognize the coordinates of all pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one pixel at the center, and may be a pixel at a corner such as the upper left or upper right, for example. Since sprite data and still image data are basically defined as rectangular, by using corner pixels as reference pixels, it becomes easier for the LSI 85 for presentation to recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the presentation CPU 82. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 83 as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting α values.

The address information A(0), A(1), A(2), . . . is set with information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored. Here, when using each image data in the production LSI 85, the image data is not directly read out from the memory module 83 and used, but is stored in the VRAM 86 from the memory module 83 by the time the image data starts to be used. At the same time, the image data is read out from the pre-transfer area 86a (see FIG. 13) and used. In this case, in the 2D drawing list output from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85, excluding decoded image data created by executing decoding processing on moving image data, the 2D drawing list is stored in the memory module 83 as address information. Address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored is set. When image data is transferred from the area of the address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the information of the address ID to the pre-transfer area 86a in the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85, the image data is transferred in the pre-transfer area 86a. The information corresponding to the address of the area where the image data was transferred is overwritten with the address information corresponding to the image data to be read this time in the 2D drawing list.

On the other hand, since the decoded image data is written to the moving image development area 119 (see FIG. 16) provided in the register 93, it is not necessary to read it from the memory module 83. Therefore, when decoded image data is set in the 2D drawing list, the address information corresponding to the decoded image data includes the area where the decoded image data to be used this time is stored in the video development area 119. Address is set. Since the decoded image data is treated as not to be transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a by the pre-transfer control unit 94, the pre-transfer control unit 94 does not rewrite the address information corresponding to the decoded image data in the drawing list. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is initially blank. The configuration may be such that information for specifying the address of the area where is stored is set.

The 2D drawing list whose address information has been rewritten becomes a target for execution of drawing processing in the 2D control unit 96, but when performing the drawing processing, the 2D control unit 96 uses the information set as address information in the 2D drawing list. The image data is read from the pre-transfer area 86a or the moving image development area 119 corresponding to the image data. Incidentally, moving image data may be set as image data to be used in the 2D drawing list, but if moving image data is set, the moving image data is first read from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. The video decoder 95 of the performance LSI 85 decodes the video data read out to the pre-transfer area 86a. Then, a plurality of decoded image data obtained by the decoding process are stored in the moving image development area 119, as described above. However, the moving image data itself is excluded from the execution target of the drawing process by the 2D control unit 96.

In this way, in the 2D drawing list outputted from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85, address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as address information. On the other hand, address information for specifying the area to which the image data is transferred from the memory module 83 is not set. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information in the 2D drawing list output from the performance CPU 82. In addition, since the rendering CPU 82 does not need to set address information for specifying the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which image data is transferred in the 2D drawing list, the rendering list is It becomes possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 82.

Furthermore, when the transfer of image data from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a in the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85 is completed, the address information of the 2D drawing list is changed to the image data to be transferred in the memory module 83. The address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where is stored is rewritten in the pre-transfer area 86a to information corresponding to the address of the area to which the image data to be transferred has been transferred. As a result, even if the information corresponding to the address of the area of the advance transfer area 86a to which image data is transferred is not initially set in the 2D drawing list, when executing the drawing process in the 2D control unit 96, the Information corresponding to the address of the transfer area 86a is set in the 2D drawing list.

Next, a 3D drawing list for displaying a 3D image will be described with reference to explanatory diagrams in FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b).

Header information is set in the 3D drawing list in the same way as in the 2D drawing list. The contents of the header information are the same as those of the 2D drawing list. In addition to the above header information, the 3D drawing list includes information corresponding to multiple types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system when creating the current drawing data. Information on display order priority data indicating the arrangement order, parameter information for each image data, and address information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored are set. In detail, the display order priority data information is set to be serial number numerical information, and the combination of parameter information and address information is set in one-to-one correspondence to each numerical information. .

In the 3D drawing list in FIG. 18(a), the image data for the back is set as the first drawing target, background object A is set as second, background object B is third, etc. has been done. In addition, image data for presentation is set after these background image data, for example, presentation object A is set as mth, presentation object B is set as m+1st, etc. There is.

Multiple types of parameter information are set in the parameter information P'(0), P'(1), P'(2),..., P'(m), P'(m+1),... ing. Specifically, regarding the parameter information P'(0) of the image data for the back, as shown in FIG. 18(b), information on coordinates indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data for the back. (X value information, Y value information, Z value information), rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle in the world coordinate system when setting image data for the back side, and initial information of the image data for the back side. For the scale set as the state, scale information indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system, and uniform α indicating the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when setting the image data for the back side Value information and are set.

Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. Furthermore, although this coordinate information is set for object data, it is not set for texture data. In the texture data, coordinate values of each pixel are determined in advance in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 83 in a state attached to the combination of object data and texture data. These UV coordinate values are referred to by the 3D control unit 97 of the rendering LSI 85 when performing texture mapping.

Parameter information P'(0) includes camera information including coordinates and orientation information of a virtual camera when projecting image data for the back onto a virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and image data for the back. Light information including information on the position and direction of a virtual light source that determines shadows in the case of rendering is set.

Parameter information P'(0) is set with Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method. The Z-buffer method is when many objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) aligned on the Z-axis This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame region.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is also set as a method for performing hidden surface removal. The Z sorting method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in a corresponding unit area in a frame region for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When applying the Z sorting method, the α value set for each pixel is referenced, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel lined up on the Z axis. In this state, addition processing and arithmetic processing for fusion of the numerical information are executed. Although a detailed description of the processing configuration of hidden surface processing using Z sorting will be omitted, it is activated when displaying an effect image.

Parameter information P'(0) is set with α data designation information indicating whether α data is applied and to which it is applied, and fog designation information indicating whether fog is to be applied and to which it is applied. Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. There are two ways to set this α value on the drawing list: a method of uniformly specifying the α value, and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the presentation CPU 82. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data or texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 83 as image data. The α data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting α values.

Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, a position in the Z-axis direction. Fog is used to represent fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, one frame of the image will be fogged in a fixed manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if you apply the same fog as other objects to an object placed at the back in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and will not have a texture, so you may want to set a different fog for the object. It is good to have a configuration. Thereby, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting fog while not impairing the above-mentioned texture.

Address information A'(0), A'(1), A'(2), etc. contains information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored, similar to the 2D drawing list. It is set. In this case, in the 3D drawing list output from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85, address ID information corresponding to the address of the area where each image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as address information. This corresponds to the address of the area to which the image data is transferred in the pre-transfer area 86a when the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85 completes transferring the image data to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. Address information is rewritten in the information, and if decoded image data is set in the 3D drawing list, the address information includes the address of the area where the decoded image data is stored in the video development area 119. This is similar to the 2D drawing list in that the information corresponding to is set from the beginning and the pre-transfer control unit 94 does not perform rewriting processing on the address information. However, in a 3D image, object image data and texture image data are required to display one type of individual image, so object image data and texture image data are set as one drawing target. In addition, address information is set for each of the object image data and texture image data.

Next, the 2D drawing process executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be explained. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing 2D drawing processing executed by the 2D control unit 96. Note that the 2D control unit 96 executes 2D drawing processing using the program and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance. All of these programs and data are read into a register provided inside the 2D control unit 96 when the supply of operating power to the production LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 2D control unit 96 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use programs and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance.

First, it is determined whether the value of the 2D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the production LSI 85 is "0" and there is a 2D drawing list in the register 93 for which the execution of drawing processing has not been completed. (Step S701). The 2D creation completion flag indicates a state in which the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to one frame of image display has been completed, and the drawing created in the 2D drawing area 112 in the main display drawing area 111 by the drawing process. This flag is used by the 2D control unit 96 to specify that the data is not drawn in the first main frame area 114 or the second main frame area 115 to create drawing data for one frame. . When the drawing process for the 2D drawing list corresponding to image display for one frame is completed, the 2D creation completion flag is set to "1", and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 by the drawing process is one frame. When drawing is performed in the first main frame area 114 or the second main frame area 115 in order to create drawing data for 2D, the 2D creation completion flag is cleared to "0". In addition, a case where there is an incomplete 2D drawing list means a case where there is a 2D drawing list for which drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and a case where there is a 2D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case where there is a 2D drawing list for which drawing processing has not yet been completed for 2D drawing processing for all image data. This applies when a drawing list exists.

If the value of the 2D creation completion flag is "0" and an incomplete 2D drawing list exists, a drawing target update process is executed (step S702). In the drawing target update process, if one new 2D drawing list is to be executed for drawing processing this time, the image data set first in the display order priority data in that 2D drawing list is used for the current drawing. Select as a target for processing. On the other hand, if one 2D drawing list is currently being created, the image data set as the display order priority data next to the display order priority data of the image data that was the target of the previous drawing process is selected as the execution target for the current drawing process.

After that, the address of the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data that is the target of execution of the current drawing process is transferred, or the address of the area of the moving image in which the decoded image data that is the target of the execution of the current drawing process is expanded. The address of the development area 119 is grasped from the address information in the 2D drawing list (step S703). In this case, if the address determined from the address information corresponds to the pre-transfer area 86a, a transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 to read the image data from that address in the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, if the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the video development area 119, image data is read from that address in the video development area 119.

Further, the parameters to be applied to the image data to be executed in the current drawing process are grasped by performing calculations using the parameter information in the 2D drawing list (step S704). Thereafter, a write process is executed to draw the image data to be executed in the current drawing process in the area to be drawn while applying the parameters grasped in step S704 (step S705). In this writing process, if drawing data for displaying an image on the main display device 41 is to be created, the writing process is executed in the 2D drawing area 112 of the register 93 and the image is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. When creating drawing data for the current drawing data, write processing is executed in the frame area of the first sub-frame area 117 and second sub-frame area 118 of the register 93 that is the target for creating the current drawing data. .

After that, it is determined whether the execution of the processes in steps S702 to S705 has been completed for all image data specified in one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to one frame of image display ( Step S706). If the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to one frame of image display is one, the last order of image data among the multiple types of image data that are subject to drawing instructions in that 2D drawing list. Creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data. In addition, if the number of 2D drawing lists corresponding to one frame of image display is two, multiple types of drawing instructions are targeted in the 2D drawing list that is later in the order of execution of drawing processing. Creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the last image data of the image data. In step S706, it is determined whether creation completion data is set along with the current display order priority data. If creation completion data is set (step S706: YES), execution of the processes in steps S702 to S705 is completed for all image data specified in the 2D drawing list corresponding to one frame of image display. Since this means that the process has been completed, the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 is set to "1" (step S707).

Next, the 3D drawing process executed by the 3D control unit 97 will be explained. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing 3D drawing processing executed by the 3D control unit 97. Note that the 3D control unit 97 executes 3D drawing processing using the program and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance. All of these programs and data are read out to a register provided inside the 3D control section 97 when the supply of operating power to the production LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the 3D control section 97 may be provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use programs and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance.

First, it is determined whether the value of the 3D creation completion flag provided in the register 93 of the production LSI 85 is "0" and there is a 3D drawing list in the register 93 for which the execution of drawing processing has not been completed. (Step S801). The 3D creation completion flag indicates a state in which the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to one frame of image display has been completed, and the drawing created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the main display drawing area 111 by the drawing process. This flag is used by the 3D control unit 97 to specify that the data is not drawn in the first main frame area 114 or the second main frame area 115 to create drawing data for one frame. . When the drawing process for the 3D drawing list corresponding to image display for one frame is completed, the 3D creation completion flag is set to "1", and the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 113 by the drawing process is one frame. When drawing is performed in the first main frame area 114 or the second main frame area 115 to create drawing data for 3D, the 3D creation completion flag is cleared to "0". Also, a case where there is an incomplete 3D drawing list means a case where there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing for all image data has not been completed, and a case where there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case where there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case where there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case where there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case where there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case where there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case in which there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case in which there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case in which there is a 3D drawing list for which drawing processing has not been completed for all image data, and a case in which there is a 3D drawing list that has not yet been subjected to drawing processing This applies when a drawing list exists.

If the value of the 3D creation completion flag is "0" and an incomplete 3D drawing list exists, the processes of steps S802 to S810 are executed. Note that in the processing from step S802 to step S810, it is first determined whether or not creation completion data is set along with the last display order priority data in one 3D drawing list, and whether or not creation completion data is set. If there is a 3D drawing list, only that one 3D drawing list is subjected to the processing of steps S802 to S810. On the other hand, if the creation completion data is not set, it is determined whether or not creation completion data is set along with the last display order priority data in the next 3D drawing list, and the creation completion data is is set, the two previous 3D drawing lists are collectively subjected to the processing of steps S802 to S810. As a result, even if multiple 3D drawing lists are set as 3D drawing lists for displaying one frame's worth of images, it becomes possible to appropriately create 3D drawing data. .

In step S802, the address of the pre-transfer area 86a or the video development area 119 where the background image data specified as the drawing target in the 3D drawing list is stored is determined from the address information in the 3D drawing list. Understand (step S802). In this case, if the address determined from the address information corresponds to the pre-transfer area 86a, a transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 to read the image data from that address in the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, if the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the video development area 119, image data is read from that address in the video development area 119. Thereafter, background setting processing is executed (step S803).

In the background setting process, it is determined whether or not the background image data whose address information was determined in step S802 has already been placed in the world coordinate system. If it has not been placed, a free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing for that area is executed. After that, world transformation converts the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the background image data to the coordinate values of the world coordinate system so that the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the parameter information in the 3D drawing list are obtained. Execute the process and set it in the buffer area secured above. If the 3D drawing list has been placed, the parameters to be applied to the target background image data are determined by performing calculations using the parameter information in the 3D drawing list, and the data is stored in the already reserved buffer area. Executes update processing of various set parameters. In addition, in the background setting process, a control end process is executed to delete background image data that is not specified in the current drawing list from among the image data already placed in the world coordinate system.

Thereafter, the addresses of the pre-transfer area 86a and the video development area 119, where the image data for rendering specified as the drawing target in the 3D drawing list are stored, are determined from the address information in the 3D drawing list. (Step S804). In this case, if the address determined from the address information corresponds to the pre-transfer area 86a, a transfer instruction is given to the transfer controller 92 to read the image data from that address in the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, if the address grasped from the address information corresponds to the video development area 119, image data is read from that address in the video development area 119. Thereafter, a setting process for presentation is executed (step S805).

In the effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the effect image data whose address information has been determined in step S804 has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it has not been placed, the process for starting placement is executed in the same way as described in the background setting process. If it is located, update processing of various parameters is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting processing. Furthermore, in the effect setting process, a control end process is executed to delete effect image data that is not specified in the current drawing list from among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

By executing the processes of steps S802 to S805, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 21, the placement target is placed in the world coordinate system defined by the The setting of the scene is completed in which the image data PC1 for the backmost image specified as . Note that FIG. 21 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

Thereafter, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S806). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the 3D drawing list, and based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint, the world coordinate system is set from the viewpoint to the origin. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 21, the viewpoint PC11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC11 is set.

Here, camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. . By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 21 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

Thereafter, a conversion process to a visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S807). In the conversion process to a visual field coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems described above is converted to a visual field coordinate system corresponding to a visual field (viewing angle) from a viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the visual field of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, and the individual images that are close to the viewpoint are enlarged, and the individual images that are far from the viewpoint are reduced.

Thereafter, clipping processing is performed (step S808). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S807 is grasped with its corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. In this state, each individual image is extracted in step S807 with reference to the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 21) corresponding to the frame areas 114 and 115 corresponding to the main display device 41 to be drawn. to clip.

After that, writing processing is executed (step S809). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the 3D drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are created for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. calculate.

Thereafter, in step S808, each individual image that has been clipped and has undergone lighting processing is projected (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection) onto the screen area PC12, which is a virtual two-dimensional plane, and the projected data is By executing color information setting processing, 3D drawing data is created in the 3D drawing area 113 in the register 93 (step S810). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information on the projected data in units of pixels (that is, units of polygons) or units of vertices. In the color information setting process, a texture mapping process is basically performed in which texture data corresponding to each projection data is pasted onto the projected data. Further, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping or transparency mapping may be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, or if the process in step S810 is executed, the 3D creation completion flag in the register 93 is set to "1" (step S811). Thereafter, by determining whether both the 2D creation completion flag and 3D creation completion flag of the register 93 are set to "1", the 2D control unit controls the 2D drawing list corresponding to one frame of image display. It is determined whether or not the drawing processing by the 3D control unit 96 and the drawing processing by the 3D control unit 97 for the 3D drawing list corresponding to one frame of image display have been completed (step S812). That is, it is determined whether the creation of drawing data for one frame of images on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 has been completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S812, both the 2D creation completion flag and the 3D creation completion flag are cleared to "0" (step S813). Thereafter, drawing data synthesis processing is executed (step S814). In the drawing data synthesis process, first the data created in the 3D drawing area 113 is created in the frame area for which the current drawing data is created out of the first main frame area 114 and the second main frame area 115 of the register 93. After that, the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 112 is written. In this case, since a fully transparent α value is set in the area where no image data is set in the 2D drawing area 112, for the drawing data written from the 3D drawing area 113 in the frame area to be created, Only the drawing data of the portion corresponding to the pattern image in the 2D drawing area 112 will be additionally drawn. When drawing the drawing data for the part corresponding to this design image, the area where the opaque α value is set is overwritten, and the area where the semitransparent α value is set is overwritten. Blending processing using the α value is performed. By executing the drawing data synthesis process, the creation of drawing data for displaying one frame of image on the main display device 41 is completed. As described above, for each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, image data is directly drawn in the frame area to be created among the first sub-frame area 117 and the second sub-frame area 118, so 2D When the 2D creation completion flag of the register 93 is set to "1" in the drawing process (FIG. 19), the creation of drawing data for displaying one frame's worth of images on each sub-display device 43, 44 is completed. are doing.

<Configuration regarding handling of drawing list in production LSI 85>
Next, a configuration related to handling of a drawing list in the presentation LSI 85 will be explained. As already explained, each of the main display device 41 and each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 is provided with two frame areas 114, 115, 117, and 118. In a situation where a frame worth of images is being displayed, drawing data for displaying one frame worth of images at the next image update timing is created for the other frame area. Furthermore, when creating the drawing data, the image data stored in the memory module 83 in advance is used, but the image data used when creating the drawing data is not available until the timing of creating the drawing data using the image data. The data is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86.

The timing at which drawing data is created and the timing at which image data is pre-transferred will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 22. 22(a) shows the advance transfer period of image data, FIG. 22(b) shows the drawing data creation period, and FIG. 22(c) shows the update timing of images of each display device 41, 43, 44. .

As shown in FIG. 22(c), the main display is displayed at each of t1 timing, t2 timing, t3 timing, t4 timing, t5 timing, t6 timing, t7 timing, t8 timing, and t9 timing. Updating of images in the device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 22(b), drawing data is created at each of these timings t1 to t9. These drawing data are drawn data in a frame order corresponding to the next update timing with respect to a frame order corresponding to the current image update timing. For example, at timing t1, the image of the kth frame is updated in each display device 41, 43, 44 as shown in FIG. 22(c), whereas the image of the k+1st frame is updated as shown in FIG. 22(b). Creation of drawing data for displaying the image starts. As already explained, each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 employs a double buffer method, so in a situation where an image is displayed using drawing data created in one frame area, other display devices 41, 43, and Rendering data corresponding to the next image update timing is created for the frame area.

In the configuration in which the display devices 41, 43, and 44 display images and create drawing data as described above, the image data used when creating the drawing data is the drawing data created using the image data. The data is read into the VRAM 86 at a timing before the creation start timing. There are multiple types of such advance transfer modes. One aspect thereof is to read image data used when creating drawing data using a creation period immediately before the creation period of drawing data created using the image data. Specifically, at timing t1, as shown in FIG. 22(b), creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k+1 frame is started, whereas as shown in FIG. Reading of image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the image of the (k+2)th frame to the VRAM 86 is started. Similarly, at timing t2, the creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k+2 frame starts as shown in FIG. 22(b), whereas as shown in FIG. Reading of image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the frame-th image to the VRAM 86 is started, and at timing t3, in order to display the k+3-th frame image as shown in FIG. 22(b). 22(a), reading of the image data necessary for creating the drawing data for displaying the k+4th frame image is started into the VRAM 86. , t4, as shown in FIG. 22(b), the creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k+4th frame is started, while as shown in FIG. The reading of image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the image into the VRAM 86 is started. According to this image data reading mode, it is possible to keep the data capacity of the image data that needs to be reliably read into the VRAM 86 to two frames.

Another aspect of advance transfer is that the readout period of the image data required to create one frame of drawing data is not limited to the period between one image update timing and the next image update timing; One image update timing is maintained so that the image data used for data creation is read out to the VRAM 86 at a timing before the creation start timing of drawing data created using the image data. In this mode, image data is read out over a period between the current image update timing and the next image update timing. In other words, during the period between one image update timing and the next image update timing, reading of image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying an image of a predetermined frame is completed, and the predetermined frame is In this mode, reading of image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying the image of the next frame to the eye is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22(b), the creation of drawing data for displaying the k+5th frame image is started at timing t5, and the k+6th frame image is displayed at timing t6. At timing t7, creation of drawing data for displaying the k+7th frame image is started, and at timing t8, drawing data for displaying the k+8th frame image is started. Creation of data is started, and creation of drawing data for displaying the image of the k+9th frame is started at timing t9, whereas as shown in FIG. 22(a), from timing t5 to t9 Image data necessary for creating drawing data for displaying images of the k+6th frame to the k+9th frame is read to the VRAM 86 over a timing in the middle of the timing. According to such an image data readout mode, the time required to read out the image data necessary to create drawing data for displaying the image of a predetermined frame is different from one image update timing to the next image update timing. Even if the period exceeds the period between image update timings, it is possible to absorb the excess period by using the idle time for reading that occurs because the period required to read image data is shorter than the period between image update timings. becomes.

The instruction for advance transfer of image data to the effect LSI 85 by the effect CPU 82 is performed using the drawing list as described above. Information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 where the image data is stored is set in the drawing list at the stage sent from the performance CPU 82 in association with the type of image data necessary for creating the drawing data. However, information corresponding to the address of the area to which the image data is transferred in the VRAM 86 is not set. When image data is transferred to the VRAM 86 by the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the production LSI 85, the information corresponding to the address of the area of the memory module 83 where the image data is stored is stored in the image data in the VRAM 86. The information is rewritten to correspond to the address of the transfer destination area. Then, the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 of the production LSI 85 use the drawing list whose address information has been rewritten to specify the area from which the image data is being read in the VRAM 86, and also to identify the area from which the image data is being read. Create drawing data using the read image data.

Corresponding to the handling of such a drawing list, an area in which the drawing list is stored is set in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the area in which the drawing list is stored in the register 93 of the effect LSI 85.

As shown in FIG. 23, the register 93 includes a pre-transfer storage area 121 in which the drawing lists sent from the performance CPU 82 are sequentially stored, and a drawing list stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121. A post-transfer storage area 122 in which a drawing list overwritten with information corresponding to the address of the transfer destination area is sequentially stored when the pre-transfer of the image data specified in is completed to the VRAM 86. is provided. The pre-transfer storage area 121 is provided with pre-transfer first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t, and the drawing list transmitted from the performance CPU 82 is sequentially stored in the storage areas 121a to 121t. Specifically, when a new drawing list is transmitted from the performance CPU 82 in a situation where drawing lists have been stored up to the mth storage area, the drawing list is stored in the m+1th storage area. Further, when pre-transferring image data specified by a drawing list in the pre-transfer control unit 94, the drawing lists stored first in the pre-transfer storage area 121 are subjected to preliminary transfer in order. Specifically, if the drawing list stored in the first storage area 121a before transfer is to be executed in advance transfer, and if the drawing list is to be executed in advance transfer, the first storage area 121a before transfer is After clearing 121a to "0", the drawing list stored in the (m+1)th storage area is shifted to the mth storage area. Note that the number of drawing lists that can be stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 is not limited to 20, and may be arbitrarily stored as long as all the drawing lists sent from the presentation CPU 82 can be processed in the presentation LSI 85. be. Incidentally, in order to display one frame's worth of images on each display device 41, 43, 44, as already explained, one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to one frame's worth of image display and one frame's worth of images are required. Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to image display are used, up to four storage areas among the first to 20th storage areas 121a to 121t for pre-transfer are used to display images for one frame. It is used to store the drawing list corresponding to.

The post-transfer storage area 122 is provided with post-transfer first to 20th storage areas 122a to 122t. The list is sequentially stored in storage areas 122a to 122t. Specifically, when the preliminary transfer control unit 94 completes the preliminary transfer of image data for one drawing list in a situation where drawing lists are stored up to the n-th storage area, the address information of that drawing list cannot be rewritten. After being executed, it is stored in the (n+1)th storage area. In addition, when drawing data is created in the 2D control unit 96 or 3D control unit 97, drawing processing is executed in order from the drawing list stored first in the post-transfer storage area 122. Specifically, the drawing list stored in the first post-transfer storage area 122a becomes the drawing process execution target, and when the drawing list becomes the drawing process execution target, the first storage area after transfer After clearing the area 122a to "0", the drawing list stored in the (n+1)th storage area is shifted to the nth storage area. Note that the number of drawing lists that can be stored in the post-transfer storage area 122 is not limited to 20, and the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 can process all the drawing lists that have been previously transferred. If so, it is optional. Incidentally, in order to display one frame's worth of images on each display device 41, 43, 44, as already explained, one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to one frame's worth of image display and one frame's worth of images are required. Since one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to image display are used, four storage areas among the first to 20th storage areas 122a to 122t for post-transfer are used to display images for one frame. Used to store the corresponding drawing list.

Note that a storage area group for storing 2D drawing lists and a storage area group for storing 3D drawing lists may be separately provided as the post-transfer storage area 122. In this case, the reading of the 2D drawing list by the 2D control unit 96 and the reading of the 3D drawing list by the 3D control unit 97 are performed in the order of setting in the storage area between the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list. It is possible to do this independently.

Next, the configuration of the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 to which image data is pre-transferred and the handling of the image data read into the pre-transfer area 86a will be described. FIG. 24(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance transfer area 86a.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the pre-transfer area 86a is set as a part of the VRAM 86. The pre-transfer area 86a has a storage capacity that can store and hold a large amount of image data at once. Specifically, 256 data storage areas 123 are provided so that 256 pieces of image data can be stored and held at one time. Each data storage area 123 has the same storage capacity, and the storage capacity is such that the maximum storage capacity of image data can be stored. Further, even if there is a plurality of image data whose total storage capacity is smaller than the storage capacity of one data storage area 123 to be read to the pre-transfer area 86a, the plurality of image data One piece of image data is read out for one data storage area 123.

When reading the image data according to the drawing list, the advance transfer control unit 94 causes the data storage areas 123 from which the image data is to be read to be sequentially changed in a predetermined order. Specifically, the data storage areas 123 are set to occur in an order such as 0th to 255th, and the final address in the kth data storage area 123 is the start address in the k+1th data storage area 123. It is a sequential number with the address. When reading one piece of image data to the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 reads the data in the next sequential order from the data storage area 123 that has stored the image data to be read in the previous pre-transfer execution time. The image data to be read this time is stored in the data storage area 123.

In order to specify the type of data storage area 123 to be read out, the register 93 of the performance LSI 85 is provided with an identification information counter 124 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24(b). The identification information counter 124 has a data capacity of 1 byte, and can be set to any of the information corresponding to numbers "0" to "255". When storing one piece of image data in the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 stores the image data in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124. After storing the image data, 1 is added to the value corresponding to the information set in the identification information counter 124, and the storage target of the image data is updated to the data storage area 123 in the next order.

In the configuration in which 255 data storage areas 123 are provided as described above, when image data is stored in the 255th data storage area 123, the 0th data storage area is Area 123 becomes the transfer destination of image data. In this case, the image data that has already been read into the 0th data storage area 123 will be erased when new image data is read. However, the number of data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a is set so that the image data whose reading is instructed by the drawing list is not erased without being used when creating drawing data. Specifically, the mode of pre-transfer shown from timing t5 to timing t9 in FIG. 22(a) is such that an image is transferred in advance to the pre-transfer area 86a for the purpose of later use when creating drawing data. Although this is the mode in which the number of data is the largest, the number of data storage areas 123 is greater than the maximum number of image data assumed in this case. More specifically, three frames of image data will be read to the pre-transfer area 86a for later use, but the number of image data will be larger than the maximum number of image data expected as the number of three frames of image data. The number of data storage areas 123 is also large. As a result, even though the image data was previously transferred according to the predetermined drawing list, the image data that should have been previously transferred is deleted from the pre-transfer area 86a at the stage of creating the drawing data corresponding to the predetermined drawing list. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the data is lost.

In a configuration in which 256 data storage areas 123 are provided in the pre-transfer area 86a, an instruction to transfer the same image data as the image data that has already been read out to any of the data storage areas 123 can be performed using the drawing list. . In this case, if the image data is read out from the memory module 83 and read out to the pre-transfer area 86a, the readout efficiency will deteriorate. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, if the image data that is the target of a transfer instruction based on the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the image data is not read from the memory module 83. It becomes.

However, as already explained, the advance transfer control unit 94 is configured to sequentially update the data storage area 123 from which image data is to be read in a predetermined order by referring to the identification information counter 124 of the register 93. . Therefore, if the image data that is the target of a transfer instruction based on the drawing list already exists in any of the data storage areas 123, the advance transfer control unit 94 transfers the image data to the data corresponding to the current identification information counter 124. Copy to storage area 123. That is, although the image data is not read from the memory module 83, the data is copied between the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a. This makes it possible to read the image data to the data storage area 123 in the order according to the identification information counter 124, while increasing the efficiency of reading the image data. Note that if the image data that is the subject of a transfer instruction based on the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the current identification information counter 124, that state is maintained without copying the image data. However, only the identification information counter 124 is updated.

In order to enable the pre-transfer control unit 94 to specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction based on the drawing list already exists in the data storage area 123, the register 93 of the LSI for effect 85 includes a A search table 125 is provided. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125.

As shown in FIG. 25, the search table 125 is configured so that the identification information set in one-to-one correspondence with the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is a serial number in accordance with the order of the data storage areas 123. Address IDs are set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of identification information. The address ID is data that allows the advance transfer control unit 94 to specify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123. More specifically, the address ID is information set as the address information of the image data in the drawing list sent from the rendering CPU 82, and the address ID is the area where the corresponding image data is stored in the memory module 83. corresponds to the starting address. As already explained, when the image data specified in the drawing list is transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer control unit 94 transfers the image data from the area from which the image data was read in the pre-transfer area 86a. The information corresponding to the address is overwritten on the address information in the drawing list, but at that time, the address ID corresponding to the start address is searched in the search table 125 from among the address ID group that has been set in the address information in the drawing list. The image data is written in the storage area of the address ID corresponding to the identification information of the data storage area 123 from which the image data was read. As a result, the address ID of the start address corresponding to the image data stored in the data storage area 123 is set in the search table 125 in association with each data storage area 123. Therefore, by referring to the search table 125, the pre-transfer control unit 94 can specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read into the pre-transfer area 86a based on the drawing list. In addition, if the image data has already been read out, it is possible to specify the type of data storage area 123 from which the image data has been read out.

The manner in which the address information in the drawing list and the address ID in the search table are rewritten will be described with reference to FIGS. 26(a) to 26(d). FIG. 26(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list sent from the effecting CPU 82 to the effecting LSI 85, and FIG. 26(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list sent from the effecting CPU 82 to the effecting LSI 85. FIG. FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125 in various situations, and FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list after the preliminary transfer of image data is completed and the rewriting of address information is completed. 26(d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the search table 125 in a situation after the preliminary transfer of image data according to the drawing list is completed.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the drawing list sent from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85 includes addresses "A253" to "A257" as address information corresponding to image data whose display order priority data is "0". The ID range is set, and the address ID range of "B348" to "B350" is set as the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1", and the display order priority data is "1". A range of address IDs from "C001" to "C003" is set as address information corresponding to image data "2". In this case, the image data whose display order priority data is "0" is stored in the memory module 83 in the area of the address range corresponding to the address ID range of "A253" to "A257", and the display order priority data The image data whose display order priority data is "1" is stored in the memory module 83 in the area of the address range corresponding to the address ID range "B348" to "B350", and the image data whose display order priority data is "2" is stored in the memory module 83. is stored in the memory module 83 in an area of the address range corresponding to the address ID range of "C001" to "C003".

When the pre-transfer control unit 94 pre-transfers the image data specified in the drawing list of FIG. It is determined whether the data has already been read out to any of the data storage areas 123. In this specification, the start address of the address ID is used, so if the display order priority data is "0" image data, it is specified whether "A253" is set in the search table 125, and the display order is If the priority data is "1", it is determined whether "B348" is set in the search table 125, and if the display order priority data is "2", "C001" is searched. It is specified whether or not it is set in the table 125 for use.

In the search table 125 shown in FIG. 26(b), in a situation where the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 from which image data is read is "123", the drawing list shown in FIG. 26(a) is used. When pre-transferring image data with display order priority data of “0”, the start address (“A253”) of the address ID set for the image data whose display order priority data is “0” is the identification information of “120” in the search table 125. is set as the address ID corresponding to . Therefore, the pre-transfer control unit 94 does not read the image data whose display order priority data is "0" from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, but instead reads the image data from the data storage area corresponding to the identification information "120". The image data stored in 123 is copied to the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information "123". In this case, there is no need to read out image data from the memory module 83, which improves readout efficiency. Further, in the search table 125, the address ID information corresponding to the identification information "123" is rewritten to the start address of the address ID of the image data, as shown in FIG. 26(d). By rewriting the address ID information in the search table 125 in this way, it becomes possible to associate the storage status of image data in each data storage area 123 with the contents of the search table 125.

Note that even if the image data is copied in this way, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information "120" is stored and retained as is, and the identification information "120" in the search table 125 is The address ID information corresponding to the information is maintained at "A253". In this case, the search table 125 will have a plurality of pieces of identification information whose address ID information is "A253", but whether the image data to be pre-transferred has already been read into the pre-transfer area 86a or not. The identification is performed in order from the identification information with the smallest value, so if image data whose start address of the address ID is "A253" is to be transferred in advance, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information with the small value is The image data will be copied from.

On the other hand, for image data whose display order priority data is "1" and "2", the start address of the address ID is not set in the search table 125 shown in FIG. 26(b). Therefore, these image data are pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a. Then, when the preliminary transfer is completed, the rewriting process of the search table 125 is executed, so that the address ID corresponding to the identification information "124" in the search table 125 is changed as shown in FIG. 26(d). “B348” is set as the information, and “C001” is set as the address ID information corresponding to the identification information “125” in the search table 125.

When each image data is pre-transferred as described above, the pre-transfer control unit 94 executes a process of rewriting the identification information of the drawing list. In this case, as shown in FIG. 26(c), the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "0" includes identification information corresponding to the type of data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored. will be overwritten. Specifically, since the image data whose display order priority data is "0" has been copied to the data storage area 123 whose identification information corresponds to "123", the address corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "0" is copied. The information is overwritten with "123". In addition, images other than decoded image data set as display order priority data next to display order priority data set with decoded image data created by performing decoding processing on video data Address information corresponding to the data is also overwritten with identification information corresponding to the type of data storage area 123 in which the image data is stored. Note that the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is set from the beginning with information that enables the address of the area where the decoded image data is stored in the moving image development area 119 to be specified.

On the other hand, the image data is stored in the address information corresponding to the image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later and the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not decoded image data. The identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 is not written, but data indicating "1" as an offset value is written. In the next transfer processing time after the transfer processing time in which the image data is read into the data storage area 123 corresponding to the predetermined identification information, the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information after adding 1 to the predetermined identification information is the image data. This is the destination for data transfer. Therefore, for address information corresponding to image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later and whose image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not decoded image data, the offset value is "1". Data indicating this will be written. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information.

A processing configuration for enabling the advance transfer of image data as described above and the rewriting of the drawing list after the advance transfer will be described below. First, the drawing list output process executed by the rendering CPU 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. Note that the drawing list output process is executed as a part of step S507 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14) when the drawing list output timing shown in the execution target table for display control is reached. Incidentally, the output mode of the drawing list from the production CPU 82 to the production LSI 85 can be either the mode shown at the timings t1 to t5 in FIG. 22(a) or the mode shown at the timings t5 to t9 in FIG. 22(a). The mode is determined in the execution target table for display control.

First, it is determined whether a demonstration is being displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 (step S901). Demo display is a predetermined waiting period for the start of the demonstration without starting the performance for the game cycle or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode after the completion of the production for the game cycle or the production for the opening/closing execution mode. This is a display effect that is started when (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed. In the demonstration display, a first demonstration period and a second demonstration period occur alternately. During the first demonstration period, in a situation where the same background image as when the game replay is performed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, An image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 performs a predetermined action is displayed for a predetermined period. In the second demonstration period, the display of an image in which a symbol performs a predetermined action in a situation where a predetermined background image is displayed ends, and a moving image of the manufacturer's name, model name, or predetermined character is displayed.

Here, the production of the game replay is performed immediately after the supply of operating power to the production CPU 82 is started, with a predetermined background image being displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44, and the main The process starts from a state in which predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed on symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the display device 41. On the other hand, if the demonstration display is performed immediately after the supply of operating power to the performance CPU 82 is started without starting the performance of the game rerun, each display device 41 during the first demonstration period , 43 and 44 with the above-mentioned predetermined background images displayed, and an image in which the above-mentioned predetermined symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 are performing a predetermined action is displayed. be done. Also, no matter which type of performance for the game run is executed, at the final timing of the performance for the game run, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are displayed. In each case, a predetermined background image is displayed, and in the main display device 41, symbols corresponding to the stop result are stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode performance is started after the completion of the performance for the relevant game round, when the performance for the next game round is started, the performance for the previous game round has ended. The process starts from the display state of the image at the timing. When the demonstration display is performed after the completion of the performance of the game repeat, the predetermined background image is displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44 during the first demonstration period, and the previous game is displayed. When the repeated performance ends, an image is displayed in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the main display device 41 are performing a predetermined action. That is, in the first demonstration period of the demonstration display, a display is performed using an image that will be displayed when starting the performance for the next game round. Therefore, during the first demonstration period of the demonstration display, the image data necessary for starting the performance for the next game round is read into the pre-transfer area 86a.

If the demo is being displayed (step S901: YES), the value of the demo displaying counter provided in the work memory 84 is incremented by 1 (step S902). The demo displaying counter is used to specify in the production CPU 82 that it is time to start the first demonstration period using all the image data necessary to start the production of the game round next time. It is a counter. If the value of the demo displaying counter after adding 1 is the start reference value of the first demo period (step S903: YES), after clearing the value of the demo displaying counter to "0" (step S904), the game Data setting is performed so that the image data necessary to start the repeated performance next time is specified in the current drawing list (step S905). As a result, even if the demo display continues, the image data necessary to start the next game performance is periodically used, and is read into the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. becomes.

In addition, even if the demo is not being displayed (step S901: NO), the timing before the end when the supply of operating power to the CPU 82 for effect is started or when the ending period is being executed in the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. If so (step S906: YES), data is set so that the image data necessary to start the next game performance is specified in the current drawing list (step S905). In addition, when the process of step S905 is executed during the opening/closing execution mode, the image data necessary for starting the performance of the game round next time is used to create the drawing data of the image data that is set as the target of advance transfer. Not set as a target.

By executing the processing from step S901 to step S906, the image data necessary to start the performance for the next game round is stored in the VRAM 86 at least at the timing when it is possible to start the performance for the next game round. The data is read into the pre-transfer area 86a. This situation will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 28(a) shows the timing at which an instruction to read out the image data necessary to start the effect for the game repeat is given by the drawing list, and FIG. FIG. 28(c) shows a period during which the image data is being read out to the pre-transfer area 86a, FIG. 28(c) shows a period during which the effect for the game round is being executed, and FIG. 28(d) shows the period during which the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. FIG. 28(e) shows the period during which the demo display is being executed.

By starting the supply of operating power to the performance CPU 82 at the timing t1, the image data necessary for starting the performance for the game round is transferred in advance from the memory module 83 as shown in FIG. 28(a). Reading to area 86a is performed. Thereafter, at timing t2, a start waiting period elapses without starting the performance of the game rerun from timing t1, and a demonstration display is started as shown in FIG. 28(e). In the demo display, the first demo period in which an image is displayed using the image data necessary to start the performance of the next game round is started, so at the timing t2, the first demo period shown in FIG. 28 ( As shown in a), image data necessary for starting the performance of the game round is read out.

Here, 256 data storage areas 123 are provided in the pre-transfer area 86a described above, but when pre-transferring image data specified by the drawing list, there are 256 data storage areas 123 from which the image data is read. will be overwritten. On the other hand, as already explained, if the image data specified to be pre-transferred by the drawing list has already been read out to any data storage area 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is stored in the memory module 83. The data is not read from the data storage area 123, but is stored in the data storage area 123 of the read destination by copying between the data storage areas 123. In this case, since there is no need to read the image data from the memory module 83, it is possible to quickly read the image data to the data storage area 123 from which it is to be read.

In this case, at the timing t2, the image data necessary for starting the performance for the game round, which was pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a at the timing t1, is stored and held. Therefore, at the timing t2, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. In addition, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123, and the image data is stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the current value of the identification information counter 124. In order to erase the image data from the storage area 123, it is necessary to switch the image data to be read out once in the data storage area 123. In other words, the timing at which the image data necessary to start the performance for the next game round is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a allows enough time for the switching of the image data to be read out once in the data storage area 123. It happens.

Thereafter, the first demonstration period starts again at timing t3 in a situation where the demonstration display is continued. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(a) at the timing t3, image data necessary for starting the performance for the game round is read out. The first demo period is restarted when the value of the demo displaying counter, which is cleared to "0" at the timing when the first demo period was started last time and is periodically updated thereafter, reaches the start reference value. This start reference value is set so that the first demonstration period starts within the range in which all of the image data necessary to start the next game production next time is stored and held in the pre-transfer area 86a. There is. As a result, while the demo display is being executed, regardless of the duration of the demo display, all image data necessary for starting the next game performance is read to the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. The situation is as follows. With this configuration, at the timing t3, the image data necessary to start the performance of the game round that was copied between the data storage areas 123 at the timing t2 is stored and held. ing. Therefore, at the timing t3, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83. In addition, at the timing t3, the image data necessary to start the performance for the next game round is copied between the data storage areas 123, so that the image data necessary for starting the performance for the next game round is copied between the data storage areas 123. The timing at which data is erased from the pre-transfer area 86a is such that there is enough margin for switching the image data read target once in the data storage area 123.

Thereafter, when the conditions for starting the game repeat effect at timing t4 are satisfied, the demo display is ended as shown in FIG. 28(e), and the game repeat effect is started as shown in FIG. 28(c). is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(a) at the timing t4, image data necessary for starting the performance for the game round is read out. During the first demo period of the demo display, as already explained, the image data necessary to start the next game replay is read into the pre-transfer area 86a, and during the duration of the demo display. Regardless, the first demonstration period is restarted so that the state in which the image data is read into the pre-transfer area 86a is maintained. Therefore, at the timing t4, the image data necessary to start the performance of the current game round is stored and held in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. Therefore, at timing t4, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

Thereafter, at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 28(c), it is the end timing of the performance for the game round. In this case, as already explained, no matter which type of performance for the game run is executed, during the end period of the performance for the game run, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44, and on the main display device 41, symbols corresponding to the stop results are stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In other words, the image data for displaying the image has been read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. Note that advance transfer of image data necessary for displaying images during the end period of the game performance to the data storage area 123 is performed in accordance with the mode of advance transfer at timings t5 to t9 in FIG. 22(a). It is being said. As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to pre-transfer the image data necessary to display the image during the end period of the game performance, the image data can be transferred to the end period of the game performance. It is possible to transfer the data to the data storage area 123 in advance before the start.

Thereafter, at timing t6, a new game performance is started as shown in FIG. 28(c). In this case, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 28(a), image data necessary for starting the effect of the game round is read out. As already explained, when a new game replay is started after the game replay has ended, it starts from the image display state at the timing when the previous game replay ended. Further, the performance for the current game round is started without transitioning to the demonstration display after the previous game round performance has ended. Therefore, at the timing t6, the image data necessary to start the performance of the current game round has been read into the data storage area 123, so the image data is transferred between the data storage areas 123. Copying is performed, and reading of the image data from the memory module 83 is not performed.

Thereafter, at timing t7, when the performance for the current game round is continuing, as shown in FIG. By advance transfer to the data storage area 123, the image data necessary for starting the performance of the game round is erased from the data storage area 123. However, since the game replay is continuing, the image data necessary to start the game replay will be used at least until the end of the game replay. Not.

Thereafter, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 28(c), it is the end timing of the performance for the game round. In this case, as already explained, no matter which type of performance for the game run is executed, during the end period of the performance for the game run, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second A predetermined background image is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44, and on the main display device 41, symbols corresponding to the stop results are stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In other words, the image data for displaying the image has been read into the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. Note that advance transfer of image data necessary for displaying images during the end period of the game performance to the data storage area 123 is performed in accordance with the mode of advance transfer at timings t5 to t9 in FIG. 22(a). It is being said. As a result, even if it takes a certain amount of time to pre-transfer the image data necessary to display the image during the end period of the game performance, the image data can be transferred to the end period of the game performance. It is possible to transfer the data to the data storage area 123 in advance before the start.

Since this game round corresponds to the jackpot result, the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is started at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 28(d). After that, at timing t9, when the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being continued, the performance of the game cycle read out during the end period of the performance of the immediately previous game cycle, as shown in FIG. 28(b). The image data necessary to start the process is deleted from the data storage area 123. However, since the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being continued, the image data necessary to start the performance for the game round will not be used at least until the end timing of the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. This is not the case.

After that, at the timing t10, the predetermined pre-end timing when the ending period is being executed in the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is reached.Therefore, at the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 28(a), the next game Image data necessary to start the replay performance is read into the data storage area 123. This image data is stored and held at least until the performance for the opening/closing execution mode ends and the performance or demonstration display for a new game run is started.

Thereafter, at timing t11, the performance for the opening/closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 28(d), and the performance for a new game round starts as shown in FIG. 28(c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(a) at the timing t11, the image data necessary to start the effect of the game replay is read out, but the image data is read out from the data storage area 123 at the timing t10. Therefore, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123, and the image data is not read from the memory module 83.

As described above, even if the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 is erased sequentially as other image data is pre-transferred, at the timing when the performance for the game series is started, The image data necessary to start the performance has already been read into the data storage area 123. As a result, even if the configuration is such that it takes a certain period of time to read out the image data necessary to start the performance of the game run from the memory module 83, the game play will be delayed due to the influence of the reading period of the image data. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a delay in the start of the performance.

Returning to the description of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27), if a negative determination is made in step S903, if the process of step S905 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S906, 2D image data is aggregated. Processing is executed (step S907). In the aggregation process, all image data to be set in the 2D drawing list in the current process is specified. In this case, if the process of step S905 is being executed, the image data that is necessary to start the effect of the game replay and that is used in the drawing process of the 2D control unit 96 is aggregated. Included in specific targets in processing.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S908). Note that the reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plural number. If the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is less than the reference number (step S908: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S909). All of the 2D image data collected in step S907 is set in this one 2D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 2D drawing list (step S910). As already explained, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), thereby setting one or two 2D objects corresponding to one frame of image display. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all image data specified in the drawing list.

On the other hand, if the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S908: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S911). In this case, the 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is distributed and set in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring continuity of writing order. In both of these two 2D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 2D drawing lists, the creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing list that will later be subjected to drawing processing in the 2D control unit 96 (step S912). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 2D drawing list. As already explained, the 2D control unit 96 determines whether or not creation completion data has been set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), thereby setting one or two 2D objects corresponding to one frame of image display. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all image data specified in the drawing list.

As described above, if the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S907 is less than the reference number, the image data is set in one 2D drawing list, and if it is greater than or equal to the reference number, multiple 2D drawings are created. By distributing and setting the image data in the list, it is possible to suppress the number of image data set in one 2D drawing list to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of 2D image data required to display one frame of images changes, the data capacity of one 2D drawing list can be kept below a predetermined capacity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data capacity of one 2D drawing list sent from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 from becoming extremely large, and accordingly, the data capacity of one 2D drawing list sent from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 can be prevented from becoming extremely large. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S910 or step S912 is executed, 3D image data aggregation process is executed (step S913). In the aggregation process, all image data to be set in the 3D drawing list in the current process is specified. In this case, if the process of step S905 is being executed, the image data that is necessary to start the effect of the game replay and that is used in the drawing process of the 3D control unit 97 is aggregated. Included in specific targets in processing.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S914). Note that the reference number is arbitrary as long as it is a plural number. If the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is less than the reference number (step S914: NO), one 3D drawing list is created (step S915). All of the 3D image data collected in step S913 is set in this one 3D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list (step S916). As already explained, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20), thereby setting one or two 3D objects corresponding to one frame of image display. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all image data specified in the drawing list.

On the other hand, if the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S914: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S917). In this case, the 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is distributed and set in two 3D drawing lists while ensuring continuity in writing order. In both of these two 3D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets the creation completion data in the 3D drawing list that will later be the target of execution of drawing processing (step S918). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list. As already explained, the 3D control unit 97 determines whether or not creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20), thereby setting one or two 3D objects corresponding to one frame of image display. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all image data specified in the drawing list.

As described above, if the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S913 is less than the reference number, the image data is set in one 3D drawing list, and if it is greater than or equal to the reference number, multiple 3D drawings are created. By dispersing and setting the image data in the list, it is possible to suppress the number of image data set in one 3D drawing list to less than the reference number. As a result, even if the number of 3D image data required to display one frame of images changes, the data capacity of one 3D drawing list can be kept below a predetermined capacity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data capacity of one 3D drawing list sent from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 from becoming extremely large, and accordingly, the data capacity of one 3D drawing list sent from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 can be prevented from becoming extremely large. It is possible to prevent the transmission period from becoming extremely long.

When the process of step S916 is executed or when the process of step S918 is executed, a drawing list to be output to the LSI for effect 85 is grasped (step S919). In this case, at least one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list are grasped, and at most two 2D drawing lists and two 3D drawing lists are grasped. Thereafter, a process for outputting one drawing list among the plurality of drawing lists grasped in step S919 to the effect LSI 85 is executed (step S920). Then, if the output of all the drawing lists grasped in step S919 to the production LSI 85 is not completed (step S921: YES), the process of step S920 is continued until the output of all the drawing lists is completed. repeat. As a result, a drawing list for displaying one frame of images is output.

In this case, one 2D drawing list and one 3D drawing list may be outputted alternately. With this configuration, even if at least one of the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list is two as the drawing list for displaying one frame's worth of images, the LSI 85 for rendering has two 2D drawing lists. The 3D drawing list and the 3D drawing list will be sent alternately. By transmitting the drawing list in this way, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list are alternately stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 and the post-transfer storage area 122 of the register 93. becomes. Thereby, for example, after the 2D control unit 96 reads out the 2D drawing list from the post-transfer first storage area 122a in the post-transfer storage area 122, the 3D drawing list is stored in the post-transfer first storage area 122a. is shifted, and the 3D control unit 97 can read out the 3D drawing list. Therefore, it becomes possible for the 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 to execute drawing processing at the same time.

Next, the pre-transfer processing executed by the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the LSI 85 for presentation will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. Note that the pre-transfer control unit 94 uses the program and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance to execute the pre-transfer process periodically (for example, every 2 msec). All of these programs and data are read into a register provided inside the pre-transfer control section 94 when the supply of operating power to the production LSI 85 is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the pre-transfer control section 94 is provided as a dedicated circuit that does not use programs and data stored in the memory module 83 in advance.

In the preliminary transfer process, first, it is determined whether there is a drawing list for which preliminary transfer has not been completed (step S1001). Specifically, if the pre-transfer process for one drawing list has started but the pre-transfer process for all image data set in that one drawing list has not been completed, This means that there is a drawing list whose transfer has not been completed. Furthermore, even if the pre-transfer processing for one drawing list has been completed, the pre-transfer storage area 121 (see FIG. 23) in the register 93 of the presentation LSI 85 still contains the pre-transfer processing. If there is a drawing list that has not been executed, this means that there is a drawing list for which preliminary transfer has not been completed.

If an incomplete drawing list exists (step S1001: YES), image data to be pre-transferred in the current pre-transfer process is determined (step S1002). In this case, if the timing is in the middle of pre-transfer processing for one drawing list, the display order priority data for the image data that was subject to pre-transfer processing in the previous processing time in that drawing list is the next one. The image data in the order of is grasped as the target of the current advance transfer. Further, when it is the start timing of pre-transfer processing for a new drawing list, the image data whose display order priority data is first in the drawing list is grasped as the target of the current pre-transfer.

If the image data to be pre-transferred identified in step S1002 is decoded image data created by performing decoding processing on moving image data (step S1003: YES), steps S1004 to S1015 The process proceeds to step S1016 without executing the process. On the other hand, if the image data to be pre-transferred as determined in step S1002 is not decoded image data (step S1003: NO), the value of the identification information counter 124 (see FIG. 24(b)) of the register 93 is set to 1. are added (step S1004). If the value of the identification information counter 124 after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of the identification information counter 124 (step S1005: YES), the value of the identification information counter 124 is cleared to "0" (step S1006).

If a negative determination is made in step S1005, or if the process in step S1006 is executed, by referring to the address information set in the drawing list in association with the image data to be transferred in advance, which was grasped in step S1002. , the start address in the address ID range corresponding to the image data is grasped (step S1007). Then, by executing the matching process on the search table 125 (see FIG. 25), it is determined whether the start address is set to correspond to any identification information in the search table 125 (see FIG. 25). (Step S1008).

If it is determined in the matching process that the start address is not set in the search table 125 (step S1009: NO), a read setting process from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1010). Specifically, the address ID range set in the address information of the drawing list is output to the transfer controller 92 in correspondence with the image data to be transferred in advance this time. Furthermore, in order to make the transfer controller 92 recognize the destination of the image data to be transferred in advance this time, the current value of the identification information counter 124 in the data storage area 123 of the advance transfer area 86a is output to the transfer controller 92 as identification information. . As a result, the image data to be transferred in advance this time is read out from the memory module 83, and the read image data is written in the area in the data storage area 123 that is the destination of the current transfer. Note that the processing details of the transfer controller 92 for transferring the image data will be explained later.

On the other hand, if it is specified in the verification process in step S1008 that the start address is set in the search table 125 (step S1009: YES), a copy setting process in the pre-transfer area 86a is executed (step S1011). Specifically, the image data stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the identification information for which the start address is set in the search table 125 is stored in the data storage area 123 corresponding to the current value of the identification information counter 124. An instruction for copying to area 123 is given to transfer controller 92 . In this case, identification information corresponding to the copy source data storage area 123 and identification information corresponding to the copy destination data storage area 123 are output to the transfer controller 92 . As a result, the image data to be subjected to the current preliminary transfer is written to the area of the current transfer destination in the data storage area 123 without having to read the image data from the memory module 83.

When the process of step S1010 or step S1011 is executed, a process of rewriting the search table 125 is executed (step S1012). Specifically, for the address ID information in the search table 125 that corresponds to the data storage area 123 that is the current transfer destination area, the drawing list is created in correspondence with the image data that is the target of the current advance transfer. Overwrites the starting address information in the address ID range set in the address information. This makes it possible to match the contents of the search table 125 with the contents of the types of image data actually stored in each data storage area 123.

Thereafter, on the condition that the image data to be transferred in advance this time is moving image data (step S1013: YES), an instruction to decode the moving image data is given to the moving image decoder 95 of the production LSI 85 ( Step S1014). At the time of this decoding instruction, information that allows the video decoder 95 to specify the area in the data storage area 123 where the moving image data that is the target of the current decoding instruction is stored, and The video decoder 95 is provided with information that enables the video decoder 95 to specify an area in the development area 119 in which decoded image data obtained by decoding the video data is to be stored. As a result, the video decoder 95 executes the decoding process on the video data that is the target of the decoding instruction, and the decoded image data created by the decoding process is transferred to the designated area in the video development area 119. written.

If a negative determination is made in step S1013, or if the process in step S1014 is executed, address information rewriting process is executed (step S1015). FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing address information rewriting processing.

In the address information rewriting process, the image data targeted for this preliminary transfer is the image data set corresponding to the first display order priority data in the drawing list, and the decoded image to the immediately previous display order priority data. It is determined whether the data is any of the set image data (step S1101). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, identification information corresponding to the type of data storage area 123 in which the image data is currently stored is added to the address information corresponding to the image data that is the target of the current advance transfer in the drawing list. is overwritten (step S1102).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1101, the data indicating that the offset value for the identification information of the data storage area 123 to which the image data corresponding to the immediately preceding display order priority data was transferred in advance is "1" is This is written in the address information corresponding to the image data that is currently the subject of advance transfer in the drawing list. By uniformly writing data indicating that the offset value is "1" instead of writing identification information, it is possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information. . On the other hand, since no image data has been set before the image data set in correspondence with the first display order priority data in the drawing list, the address information is overwritten with the identification information as described above. Furthermore, since the decoded image data is stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93, the address of the corresponding area in the moving image expansion area 119 is set in the address information of the decoded image data. Therefore, for image data for which decoded image data is set as the immediately preceding display order priority data, the address information cannot be specified by the offset value, so the address information is overwritten with the identification information as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the advance transfer process (FIG. 29), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1003 or after the address information rewriting process is executed in step S1015, one drawing list will be updated in this processing time. On the condition that the advance transfer is completed (step S1016: YES), advance transfer completion processing is executed (step S1017). In the pre-transfer completion process, the drawing list for which the current pre-transfer has been completed is stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23) to be stored this time in the post-transfer storage area 122 of the register 93. As a result, the drawing list becomes a target for subsequent drawing processing by the 2D control unit 96 or drawing processing by the 3D control unit 97. In addition, in the pre-transfer completion process, if there is a drawing list for which preliminary transfer has not been completed in the pre-transfer storage area 121 of the register 93, a new drawing list is added from the pre-transfer first storage area 121a. At the same time, processing is executed to shift the drawing list between the first to 20th storage areas 121a to 121t in the pre-transfer storage area 121.

<Effects of configuration regarding handling of drawing list in production LSI 85>
By transferring the image data pre-stored in the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, when the image data is used in the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97, it is possible to directly read it from the memory module 83. Instead, it is sufficient to read from the pre-transfer area 86a. In this case, if the predetermined image data is the subject of a transfer instruction to the pre-transfer area 86a, if the pre-determined image data is not stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the memory module 83 transfers the data to the pre-transfer area 86a. If the predetermined image data is read out to the memory module 86a and the predetermined image data is already stored in the pre-transfer area 86a, the predetermined image data is not transferred from the memory module 83. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined image data from being further transferred from the memory module 83 even though the predetermined image data is already stored in the pre-transfer area 86a. It becomes possible to improve the efficiency of reading image data from the module 83.

When a transfer instruction is issued for image data that has already been read out to any of the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a. Ru. This makes it possible to store the image data in the data storage area 123 designated as the transfer instruction, while eliminating the need for further reading of the image data from the memory module 83.

A search table 125 is provided in which data corresponding to the type of image data stored in each data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is set, and by referring to the search table 125, transfer instructions can be obtained. It is determined whether or not the target image data is stored in any data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a. This makes it possible to efficiently specify whether or not the image data that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read into the pre-transfer area 86a.

When image data is transferred to any of the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a, the correspondence between the data storage area 123 to which it is transferred and the type of image data is reflected. The contents of the search table 125 are updated. This allows the contents of the search table 125 to correspond to the latest storage state of the pre-transfer area 86a.

In the drawing list, an address ID for specifying the area where the image data is stored in the memory module 83 is set as information corresponding to the image data to be used. When image data is to be transferred from the pre-transfer area 86a to the pre-transfer area 86a, the area where the image data is stored in the memory module 83 is specified using the address ID. In this case, the information set as the address ID is set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123. Thereby, when specifying whether or not the image data that is the target of a transfer instruction is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a using the search table 125, the address ID provided in the drawing list can be used. can be used as is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when performing the identification.

In a configuration in which a plurality of address IDs corresponding to areas stored in the memory module 83 are set in the drawing list provided by the rendering CPU 82 in correspondence with one piece of image data to be used, the data The only information set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the storage area 123 is the address ID corresponding to the start address. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 in the search table 125, and to check whether the image data is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load when referring to the search table 125 in order to specify whether or not the search is performed.

The image data necessary to start the performance of the game round is periodically read to the pre-transfer area 86a during the demonstration display, and is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a before the end of the opening/closing execution mode. It will be read to. As a result, even if the image data pre-transferred to the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a is sequentially erased as other image data is pre-transferred, the timing for starting the performance for the game round can be adjusted. In this case, the image data necessary to start the performance of the game is already read into the data storage area 123. As a result, even if the configuration is such that it takes a certain period of time to read out the image data necessary to start the performance of the game run from the memory module 83, the game play will be delayed due to the influence of the reading period of the image data. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a delay in the start of the performance.

When image data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 according to the address ID set in the drawing list provided by the rendering CPU 82, the pre-transfer control unit 94 transfers the image data in the pre-transfer area 86a. Identification information for specifying the area where data is stored is set in the drawing list. Thereby, since it is not necessary to set both the address ID and the identification information in the drawing list from the beginning, it is possible to suppress the amount of information in the drawing list transmitted from the performance CPU 82. Furthermore, when the image data is actually transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the identification information corresponding to the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data was transferred is set in the drawing list. It becomes possible to improve reliability.

When image data is transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a according to the address ID of the drawing list provided by the performance CPU 82, identification information corresponding to the area of the pre-transfer area 86a to which the image data was transferred is It is set as the address information of the drawing list by overwriting the address ID. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information in the drawing list provided to the 2D control unit 96 or 3D control unit 97 after the transfer of image data is completed.

The identification information that is overwritten on the address information in the drawing list when the image data transfer is completed has a smaller amount of information than the address ID that is originally set in the drawing list. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when overwriting the address information with the identification information in the advance transfer control unit 94.

The register 93 includes a pre-transfer storage area 121 for storing the drawing list provided by the performance CPU 82, and a post-transfer storage area 122 for storing the drawing list for which identification information has been set by the pre-transfer control unit 94. are provided separately. As a result, the areas in which the drawing list provided by the performance CPU 82 and the drawing list in which the preliminary transfer of image data has been completed and the identification information has been stored are clearly distinguished, and these drawing lists can be stored. It becomes possible to clearly distinguish them.

Decoded image data created by performing decoding processing on moving image data is stored in a moving image development area 119 in the register 93. In this case, the decoded image data is excluded from being pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a by the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the process of setting identification information to the address information corresponding to the decoded image data is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the pre-transfer control unit 94 from wastefully setting information for the address information of the drawing list.

Address information corresponding to image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list, and whose image data corresponds to the immediately preceding display order priority data is not decoded image data, has an offset value of "1". ” is written. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for rewriting the address information.

In a configuration in which image data is stored across a plurality of areas in the VRAM 86, when the transfer of the image data to the VRAM 86 is completed, identification information corresponding to the plurality of areas is set in the address information of the drawing list. In this case, since the configuration is such that multiple areas in the VRAM 86 are specified as a group of storage areas using identification information, the pre-transfer control unit 94 In this case, it is possible to suppress the amount of information set in the address information of the drawing list.

A plurality of drawing lists are provided from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing. This makes it possible to prevent the amount of information in one drawing list provided from the performance CPU 82 from becoming extremely large, and also to prevent various pieces of information from being mixed in one drawing list. It becomes possible to prevent the processing load on the presentation LSI 85 from increasing.

Information necessary for causing the 2D control unit 96 to execute 2D drawing processing is provided from the performance CPU 82 as a 2D drawing list, and information necessary for causing the 3D control unit 97 to execute 3D drawing processing is provided as a 2D drawing list. It is provided from the rendering CPU 82 as a drawing list. This makes it possible to identify whether the image data to be used corresponds to 2D drawing processing or 3D drawing processing in units of drawing lists. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when specifying the type of image data in the presentation LSI 85.

If the number of 2D image data to be used at one update timing is equal to or greater than the reference number, the 2D image data is distributed and set in a plurality of 2D drawing lists. Further, if the number of 3D image data to be used at one update timing is equal to or greater than the reference number, the 3D image data is distributed and set in a plurality of 3D drawing lists. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information of one drawing list provided from the performance CPU 82 to a certain amount of information, and prevents the transmission period of one drawing list from becoming extremely long. becomes possible.

Even if a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided to display an image at one update timing, the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists may be Creation completion data is set in the last 2D drawing list or the last 3D drawing list so that the production LSI 85 can specify that it will be used collectively at the update timing. This makes it possible for the presentation LSI 85 to recognize that the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists are for displaying images at one update timing.

The function of pre-transferring image data according to the drawing list provided by the rendering CPU 82 is assigned to the pre-transfer control section 94, and the function of creating drawing data according to the drawing list is assigned to the 2D control section 96 or 3D control section 97. is assigned to. This makes it possible to distribute the processing load compared to a configuration in which these processes are executed all at once in one control means.

The 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 execute the drawing process using the drawing list for which the advance transfer of image data has been completed in the advance transfer control section 94. This makes it possible to distribute the functions of each process to a plurality of control means without providing a plurality of identical drawing lists from the effect CPU 82.

<Configuration related to transfer controller 92>
Next, a configuration for transferring data in the transfer controller 92 of the production LSI 85 will be described.

As already explained, image data is pre-transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 under the control of the pre-transfer control unit 94, and the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 perform pre-transfer of the VRAM 86 when creating drawing data. Image data is read from the area 86a, and the video decoder 95 reads the video data from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 when decoding the video data. In addition to reading image data, the light emitting decoder 101 pre-transfers light emitting data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 when decoding the light emitting data, and reads the pre-transferred light emitting data from the VRAM 86. Furthermore, when decoding the sound output data, the sound decoder 103 pre-transfers the sound output data from the memory module 83 to the VRAM 86 and reads the pre-transferred sound output data from the VRAM 86 . The process of reading out these various data is executed by the transfer controller 92.

Here, as already explained, the address ID corresponding to the physical address of the memory module 83 in which the image data is stored is set as the address information of the image data in the drawing list output from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85. The physical address itself is not set. As already explained, data other than image data is set in the memory module 83, and there are also areas in which no data is stored. In this case, a part of the area of the memory module 83 is used as an area for storing image data, and accordingly, the address range of the area storing image data is the entire address range of the memory module 83. The range is narrower than that. In such a configuration, the address ID specified as address information in the drawing list is information for specifying only the area in the memory module 83 where image data is stored. In this case, since the number of address IDs that can be used is smaller than the number of physical addresses of the memory module 83, the data capacity for specifying one address ID is also the data capacity for specifying a physical address. becomes smaller than By reducing the data capacity for specifying one address ID, it becomes possible to reduce the data capacity of address information specified in the drawing list, and as a result, the data capacity of the drawing list can be reduced. becomes possible.

Since the pre-transfer control unit 94 uses the address ID as information for specifying the address of the area where image data is stored in the memory module 83, the image data is transferred from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. When issuing a read instruction to the transfer controller 92, the address ID is provided to the transfer controller 92. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 31, the transfer controller 92 is set with a file table 126 that defines the correspondence between address IDs and physical addresses. In the file table 126, the physical address (AD(0) ), AD(1), AD(2), ..., AD(n+2)) are set. By referring to the file table 126, the transfer controller 92 specifies the physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID specified by the advance transfer control unit 94, and reads the image data from the area of the specified physical address. I do.

The above address conversion in the transfer controller 92 is performed not only for the memory module 83 but also for the VRAM 86. This content will be explained below. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the VRAM 86 and the index area.

As shown in FIG. 32, the VRAM 86 is partitioned into a plurality of index areas 127a to 127c. Specifically, it is divided into three areas: a first index area 127a, a second index area 127b, and a third index area 127c. The area included in the first index area 127a is an area of the VRAM 86 with consecutive physical addresses, and the area included in the second index area 127b is an area of the VRAM 86 with consecutive physical addresses. The area that is not included in the first index area 127a and the area that is included in the third index area 127c is an area in which physical addresses are consecutive in the area of the VRAM 86, and the first index area 127a and the second index area 127b are areas that are not included in the first index area 127a. This is an area not included in Furthermore, the final address of the area included in the first index area 127a is continuous with the start address of the area included in the second index area 127b, and the final address of the area included in the second index area 127b is continuous with the start address of the area included in the second index area 127b. The address is continuous with the start address of the area included in the third index area 127c. The first index area 127a is used as an area to which light emission data is pre-transferred, and the second index area 127b is used as an area to which sound output data is pre-transferred. Further, the third index area 127c is used as an area to which image data is transferred in advance. In other words, the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is the third index area 127c.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index table 128 that defines the correspondence between each index area 127a to 127c and the physical address of the VRAM 86. Note that the index table 128 is set in the transfer controller 92.

As shown in FIG. 33, identification information is set in each of the first index area 127a, second index area 127b, and third index area 127c. The identification information of the first index area 127a is used when the light emitting decoder 101 reads the light emitting data to the VRAM 86 and specifies the area in the VRAM 86 from which the light emitting data is read out to the transfer controller 92. When the data for light emission is read from the VRAM 86 in the decoder 101, it is used to instruct the transfer controller 92 as to the area from which the data for light emission is read in the VRAM 86. The identification information in the second index area 127b is used when the sound decoder 103 reads the sound output data to the VRAM 86, and is used when specifying the read destination area in the VRAM 86 of the sound output data to the transfer controller 92. When the sound output data is read from the VRAM 86 in the decoder 103, it is used to instruct the transfer controller 92 as to the area from which the sound output data is to be read in the VRAM 86. The identification information of the third index area 127c is used to instruct the transfer controller 92 as to the area from which the image data is to be read in the VRAM 86 when the pre-transfer control unit 94 reads the image data to the VRAM 86. When image data is read from the VRAM 86 in the unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97, it is used to instruct the transfer controller 92 as to the area from which the image data is to be read in the VRAM 86. It is also used to instruct the transfer controller 92 about the storage source and storage destination areas of the image data when copying image data between the data storage areas 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 in the pre-transfer control unit 94. be done.

Identification information for each of the first index area 127a, second index area 127b, and third index area 127c is associated with areas of a plurality of consecutive physical addresses in the VRAM 86. For example, the identification information "0" in the first index area 127a is associated with areas of five consecutive physical addresses A(0) to A(4), and the identification information "0" in the second index area 127b is associated with the area of five consecutive physical addresses A(0) to A(4). The identification information of ``0'' in the third index area 127c is associated with the areas of five consecutive physical addresses A(640) to A(644), and the identification information of ``0'' in the third index area 127c corresponds to areas of five consecutive physical addresses A(640) to A(644). 1924) is associated with an area of five consecutive physical addresses. The number of physical addresses associated with each piece of identification information is constant at five. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of physical addresses associated with the identification information may be different for each type of index area 127a to 127c.

Because the number of physical addresses associated with one piece of identification information is plural in this way, when instructing the transfer controller 92 to read data to or from the VRAM 86, the instructing side allows you to specify areas corresponding to multiple physical addresses by simply specifying one piece of identification information without specifying multiple physical addresses. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to specify the area.

The number of identification information set in the first index area 127a is 128, whereas the number of identification information set in the second index area 127b and the number of identification information set in the third index area 127c are 128 pieces. The number of pieces of information is 256 each. In other words, the number of set identification information differs depending on the type of index areas 127a to 127c. Furthermore, since the number of physical addresses associated with each piece of identification information is the same as described above, the physical address of VRAM 86 assigned to each index area 127a to 127c is determined according to the type of index area 127a to 127c. The total number of is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the number of identification information set in each index area 127a to 127c is the same, and the physical address of the VRAM 86 assigned to each index area 127a to 127c may be A configuration may be adopted in which the total number of .

In the configuration in which the index areas 127a to 127c are set as described above, when the transfer controller 92 receives an instruction to read data to or from the VRAM 86, the transfer controller 92 selects a It is determined whether the index areas 127a to 127c are to be read. Specifically, the transfer controller 92 specifies the first index area 127a as the readout target when receiving an instruction from the light emitting decoder 101, and specifies the second index area 127a as the readout target when receiving an instruction from the sound decoder 103. 127b as a read target, and if an instruction is received from any one of the advance transfer control unit 94, 2D control unit 96, and 3D control unit 97, the third index area 127c is specified as a read target. Although the configuration for identifying the target receiving instructions in the transfer controller 92 is arbitrary, for example, information for identifying the party giving the instructions is set in the data for giving instructions to the transfer controller 92. There are several possible configurations. By having a configuration in which the side giving instructions to the transfer controller 92 specifies only the identification information without specifying the types of index areas 127a to 127c, the side giving the instructions can specify the areas necessary for specifying the areas to the transfer controller 92. It is possible to reduce data capacity.

The transfer execution process executed by the transfer controller 92 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. Note that the transfer controller 92 is provided as a dedicated circuit in which a circuit for executing transfer execution processing is set in advance; however, the transfer controller 92 is not limited to this, and can transfer programs and data stored in the memory module 83 or the like. The structure may be provided as a general-purpose circuit that is utilized to execute the transfer execution process.

In the transfer execution process, if an instruction to read data from the memory module 83 has been received (step S1201: YES), and if the read instruction has been received from the advance transfer control unit 94 (step S1202: YES), The physical address of the memory module 83 corresponding to the address ID received from the transfer control unit 94 is identified by referring to the file table 126 (step S1203). On the other hand, when the read instruction is received from a source other than the pre-transfer control unit 94, the physical address of the memory module 83 is received from the side issuing the read instruction.

Thereafter, the type of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified based on the type of the target for which the read instruction is issued, and the identification information received from the side issuing the read instruction is specified. Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the type and identification information of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified from the index table 128 (step S1204).

Thereafter, a read start process from the memory module 83 is executed (step S1205). In this case, an address signal for specifying the physical address of the area where the data to be read is stored in the memory module 83 and a data read instruction signal are transmitted to the memory module 83 . As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the memory module 83. Then, the output data is written into the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the physical address group specified in step S1204.

When reading of the data to be read this time is completed (step S1206: YES), the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 is set to "1" (step S1207). Thereby, the side that gave the read instruction specifies that reading of the data to be read to the VRAM 86 has been completed. Note that when the side that has given the read instruction specifies that reading of the data to be read has been completed, the read completion flag is cleared to "0".

In the transfer execution process, if an instruction to read data from the VRAM 86 is received (step S1208: YES), the type of the index area 127a to 127c is specified from the type of the target for which the read instruction is being made, and the read instruction is issued. Identify the identification information received from the party receiving the information. Then, the physical address group of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the combination of the type and identification information of the index areas 127a to 127c is specified from the index table 128 (step S1209). Furthermore, information about the area to be written that has been received from the side issuing the read instruction is specified (step S1210). In this case, the area to be written to is the register 93. Further, when image data is copied between the data storage areas 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a under the control of the pre-transfer control unit 94, the area to be written becomes the data storage area 123, that is, the third index area 127c. .

Thereafter, read start processing from the VRAM 86 is executed (step S1211). In this case, an address signal for specifying the physical address group specified in step S1209 and a data read instruction signal are transmitted to the VRAM 86. As a result, the data to be read this time is output from the VRAM 86. Then, the output data is written in the write target area specified in step S1210.

If the reading of the data to be read this time is completed (step S1212: YES), the corresponding read completion flag provided in the register 93 is set to "1" (step S1213). Thereby, the side that gave the read instruction specifies that reading of the data to be read from the VRAM 86 has been completed. Note that when the side that gave the read instruction specifies that reading of the data to be read has been completed, the read completion flag is cleared to "0".

<Effects of configuration regarding transfer controller 92>
Each area of the VRAM 86 is divided into a plurality of index areas 127a to 127c, and each area included in each index area 127a to 127c is identified using identification information set for each index area 127a to 127c. It is possible. When it is necessary to read data from the VRAM 86 in a control execution unit such as the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97, the transfer controller 92 is informed of the types of index areas 127a to 127c and the contents of the index areas 127a to 127c. By specifying the identification information set in , the transfer controller 92 specifies the area of the VRAM 86 where the data to be read is stored. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information required for specifying the area from which data is to be read in the control execution unit.

Further, one piece of identification information in each of the index areas 127a to 127c is information that collectively designates a plurality of areas of the VRAM 86. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information required to specify the area from which data is to be read, compared to the case where addresses are specified for each of the plurality of areas and data is read from the plurality of areas.

A plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 included in one index area 127a to 127c are areas with consecutive addresses. Further, the plurality of areas of the VRAM 86 specified by one piece of identification information are areas with consecutive addresses. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the area of the VRAM 86 specified by the types and identification information of the index areas 127a to 127c.

The correspondence relationship between the areas of the VRAM 86 and the combination of the type information of the index areas 127a to 127c and the identification information of each index area 127a to 127c is set in the index table 128, and the transfer controller 92 refers to the index table 128. This identifies the area of the VRAM 86 that corresponds to the above combination. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load required for the transfer controller 92 to specify the area of the VRAM 86 from which data is to be read.

A plurality of index areas 127a to 127c are set. This makes it possible to set the index areas 127a to 127c in accordance with each purpose. Further, the number of areas of the VRAM 86 included in each of the index areas 127a to 127c differs depending on the type thereof. This allows the sizes of the index areas 127a to 127c to be appropriate for each purpose.

<Configuration for displaying images on multiple display devices 41, 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for collectively updating images on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44 when it is time to update the images will be described.

As already explained, the image is updated in all of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 at each update timing. A drawing list is output from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85 in order to update the image, but the rendering list is not created individually for each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. Instead, image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are collectively set in one or two drawing lists. This makes it possible to reduce the number of drawing lists compared to a configuration in which drawing lists are created individually for each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44.

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of one drawing list in which image data corresponding to each display device 41, 43, and 44 is aggregated and set. As shown in FIG. 35, the image data for the background image that is the target of drawing instructions includes first background image data for main, first background image data for first sub, and first background image data for second sub. background image data, second background image data for main, second background image data for first sub, second background image data for second sub, third background image data for main, and third background image data for main. Third background image data for the first sub and third background image data for the second sub are set. The first to third background image data for main use are image data for displaying a background image on the main display device 41, and the first to third background image data for first sub use are image data for displaying a background image on the first sub display device 43. This is image data for displaying a background image, and the first to third background image data for the second sub are image data for displaying the background image on the second sub display device 44. In addition, the first background image data is image data corresponding to an image that is displayed as if it is located at the farthest side in each of the main, first sub, and second sub images, and the second background image data is image data that corresponds to an image that is displayed as if it were in front of it, and image data that corresponds to an image that is displayed as if the third background image data was in front of it. .

As already explained, the display order priority data indicating the drawing order of the image data, parameter information, and address information are set in the drawing list for each image data to be drawn. However, in a configuration in which image data corresponding to two or more display devices 41, 43, 44 is set for one drawing list, which display device 41, 43 the image data specified in the drawing list , 44 is not set in the drawing list. Instead, the type of display device 41, 43, 44 on which each image data is to be drawn is specified using display order priority data, which is data for indicating the drawing order of image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, for image data such as main first to third background image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the value of the display order priority data is the first display target reference value. It is set to less than "100". Furthermore, for image data such as the first to third background image data for the first sub corresponding to the first sub display device 43, the value of the display order priority data is equal to or greater than "100" which is the first display target reference value. is set to less than "200" which is the second display target reference value. Furthermore, for image data such as the first to third background image data for the second sub corresponding to the second sub display device 44, the value of the display order priority data is set to "200" or more, which is the second display target reference value. has been done.

The 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 of the production LSI 85 determine the target of the drawing instruction in the drawing list by understanding the value of the display order priority data in relation to the first display target reference value and the second display target reference value. It becomes possible to grasp which display device 41, 43, 44 the image data corresponds to. By specifying the type of display device 41, 43, 44 on which each image data is to be drawn using the display order priority data as described above, the image data corresponds to any of the display devices 41, 43, 44. There is no need to set dedicated data in the drawing list to indicate whether the This makes it possible to simplify the data structure of the drawing list. Incidentally, the maximum number of image data that can be set to be drawn on the main display device 41 in one drawing list is less than or equal to the first display target reference value (100 or less), and the The maximum number of image data set as objects to be drawn on the sub-display device 43 is less than or equal to the difference between the second display object reference value and the first display object reference value (100 or less).

The above drawing data is created by the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the performance CPU 82, but the information referred to to create the drawing list is the execution target table for display control as already explained. is set to . The performance CPU 82 derives various data to be set in the drawing list by referring to the display control execution target table in the display control task processing (step S506) in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 14).

FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining an execution target table for display control. As shown in FIG. 36(a), in the execution target table for display control, information on task contents is set in one-to-one correspondence with pointer information. The pointer information is information for the performance CPU 82 to specify which task content information should be referred to in each process in the display control task processing (step S506). When a new execution target table for display control is to be used, information on the content of the task whose pointer information corresponds to "0" is referred to, and then the process of task processing for display control (step S506) is performed. Each time a new cycle is executed, the pointer information to be referenced is updated by incrementing it by 1, and the task processing for display control is performed by referring to the information on the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information after the update. is executed. The information on the content of the task includes the type of image data necessary to display one frame of image at the corresponding update timing, and information necessary to derive various parameters to be applied to the image data. ing.

As already explained, since the image is updated on all of the main display device 41, first sub display device 43, and second sub display device 44 at each update timing, the information on the content of the task corresponding to each pointer information is is the type of image data necessary to display one frame of image at the corresponding update timing for all of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44, and the image data. The information necessary to derive various parameters to be applied to is set. FIG. 36(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of background image data set in the content of one task in a predetermined display control execution target table.

The information on the content of the task is not set as is for each image data, but information on the address ID corresponding to each image data is set as information on the type of image data. This address ID information is set as the address information of the drawing list. Furthermore, a combination of display target data, display order data, and other information is set for each type of image data information. Other information is information used to derive various parameters applied to each image data.

The display target data and display order data are information used to derive display order priority data in the drawing list. Specifically, the display target data is data used by the presentation CPU 82 to specify whether the display device to be displayed is the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, or the second sub display device 44. be. Specifically, "0" of the display target data corresponds to the main display device 41, "1" of the display target data corresponds to the first sub display device 43, and "2" of the display target data corresponds to the first sub display device 43. corresponds to the second sub-display device 44. The display order data is data for the presentation CPU 82 to specify the drawing order on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be displayed. In each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, "0" in the display order data indicates that the image data corresponds to an image that is displayed as if it is located at the farthest side, and "1" in the display order data Indicates that the image data corresponds to an image that is displayed as if it exists in front of it, and "2" in the display order data corresponds to an image that is displayed as if it existed in front of it. Indicates that it is image data.

For image data whose display target data is "0", the performance CPU 82 directly sets the display order data as the display order priority data of the drawing list. As a result, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "0", "1", and "2" are set as display order priority data for the first to third main background image data. In addition, for image data whose display target data is "1", the performance CPU 82 uses a value obtained by adding "100", which is the first display target reference value, to the value of the display order data as the display order priority data of the drawing list. Set. As a result, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "100", "101", and "102" are set as display order priority data for the first to third background image data for the first sub. In addition, for image data whose display target data is "2", the performance CPU 82 uses a value obtained by adding "200", which is a second display target reference value, to the value of the display order data as the display order priority data of the drawing list. Set. As a result, in the drawing list shown in FIG. 35, values such as "200", "201", and "202" are set as display order priority data corresponding to the first to third background image data for the second sub.

As described above, the task content information includes display target data that specifies the types of display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be drawn, and display that specifies the drawing order of image data on each display device 41, 43, and 44. sequential data is set. As a result, in the process of creating an execution target table for display control in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the designer can determine the types of display devices 41, 43, 44 to be displayed and the image data on each display device 41, 43, 44. It is sufficient to set each piece of information as is while grasping the drawing order of the drawing list, and there is no need to grasp the offset value corresponding to each display device 41, 43, 44 in the display order priority data of the drawing list. Therefore, the design work is facilitated, and the efficiency of the design work is accordingly improved.

Furthermore, even if the display order priority data is not set at the design stage but the display target data and the display order data are set, the display device 41 to be displayed in the drawing list, The distinction between 43 and 44 is made using display order priority data. This eliminates the need to set dedicated data in the drawing list that indicates which display device 41, 43, 44 the image data corresponds to, and therefore it is possible to simplify the data structure of the drawing list. Become.

The following describes the process of setting display order priority data of a drawing list using display target data and display order data. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the drawing list creation process executed by the performance CPU 82. Note that the drawing list creation process is executed when one drawing list is created in each of step S909, step S911, step S915, and step S917 in the drawing list output process (FIG. 27).

First, a writing target pointer update process in the drawing list to be created this time is executed (step S1301). The writing target pointer is information that is referenced by the performance CPU 82 to specify an area in which display order priority data, parameter information, and address information are to be set in the drawing list to be created this time. When starting to create a new drawing list, the write target pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the first area in the drawing list, and from then on, the process of step S1301 is executed. Each time the write target pointer is written, the value of the write target pointer is incremented by one.

After that, among the image data for which the current drawing list is set, there is image data for which the display target data set as the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control is "0". It is determined whether or not exists (step S1302). Specifically, if a 2D drawing list is to be created, the display target data is "0" in the various image data specified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). It is determined whether or not image data exists. Additionally, if a 3D drawing list is to be created, the display target data is "0" among the various image data specified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27). Determine whether image data exists. Note that these processing contents are the same in step S1304, which will be described later.

If there is image data whose display target data is "0" (step S1302: YES), display order data corresponding to the image data is set as display order priority data (step S1303). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is "0", the display order of that image data is set in the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control. Set the data as display order priority data for the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. Also, if there are multiple image data whose display target data is "0", select the image data whose display order data is the smallest among those image data, and respond to that image data. The display order data to be displayed is set as the display order priority data for the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

If there is no image data whose display target data is "0" (step S1302: NO), the execution target table for display control is included in the image data for which the current drawing list is set. It is determined whether there is image data whose display target data set as "1" in the content of the current task exists (step S1304). If there is image data whose display target data is "1" (step S1304: YES), the first display target reference value "100" is assigned to the display order data corresponding to the image data. The added value is set as display order priority data (step S1305). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is "1", for that image data, the display order set in the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control. A value obtained by adding "100", which is the first display target reference value, to the data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. Also, if there are multiple image data whose display target data is "1", select the image data whose display order data is the smallest among those image data, and respond to that image data. A value obtained by adding "100", which is the first display target reference value, to the display order data to be displayed is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

If there is no image data whose display target data is "1" (step S1304: NO), it means that only image data whose display target data is "2" exists. In this case, a process is performed in which a value obtained by adding the second display target reference value "200" to the display order data corresponding to the image data is set as the display order priority data (step S1306). Specifically, if there is only one image data whose display target data is "2", for that image data, the display order set in the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control. A value obtained by adding the second display target reference value "200" to the data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer. Also, if there are multiple image data whose display target data is "2", select the image data whose display order data is the smallest among those image data, and respond to that image data. A value obtained by adding the second display target reference value "200" to the display order data is set as the display order priority data of the area corresponding to the current write target pointer.

According to the above processing, the display order priority data corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is generated in a certain processing manner using the display target data and display order data set in the content of the task. It is possible to set it in the drawing list. Furthermore, since the image data to be displayed is set in the drawing list in order of image data having the smallest value, it is possible to set the display target data in the drawing list in the order of main display device 41 → first sub-display device 43 → second sub-display device 44. becomes possible.

In the drawing list creation process, if any of steps S1303, S1305, and S1306 is executed, parameter information setting process is executed (step S1307), and address information setting process is executed (step S1308). ). In the parameter information setting process, the parameter information derived in the previous display control task process (step S506) for the image data for which the current display order priority data is set is applied to the current write target pointer. Set as area parameter information. In the address information setting process, for the image data for which the current display order priority data is set, the address ID set in the content of the current task in the execution target table for display control is added to the current write target pointer. Set as address information for the area corresponding to.

Thereafter, it is determined whether there is any other image data to be written (step S1309). Specifically, if a 2D drawing list is to be created, the current one 2D drawing list among the various image data specified in step S907 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not the target of execution of steps S1302 to S1308 among the various image data that are the target of setting. In addition, if a 3D drawing list is to be created, the various image data specified in step S913 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) and the settings for the current 3D drawing list. It is determined whether or not there is image data that is not the target of execution of steps S1302 to S1308 among the various target image data. If there is image data that is not the target of execution (step S1309: YES), after executing the write target pointer update process (step S1301), the image data that is not the target of execution is updated in step S1302. ~Execute the process of step S1308. As a result, the combination of display order priority data, parameter information, and address information for this one drawing list is set for all of the image data that is subject to settings for this one drawing list. .

<Effects of the configuration for displaying images on the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44>
In a configuration in which a main display device 41, a first sub-display device 43, and a second sub-display device 44 are provided, information for displaying images on these plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44 is contained in one drawing list ( Hereinafter, the drawing list is provided to the presentation LSI 85 from the presentation CPU 82 in an aggregated state (hereinafter also referred to as an aggregated drawing list). This makes it possible to reduce the number of drawing lists provided from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85, compared to a configuration in which drawing lists are provided individually for each of the plurality of display devices 41, 43, and 44.

Information for displaying images on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 at the same update timing is aggregated and set in an aggregate drawing list. In this case, the LSI 85 for rendering only needs to treat all the information set in the aggregate drawing list as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and it is sufficient to handle all the information set in the aggregate drawing list as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and it is sufficient to handle all the information set in the aggregate drawing list as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and to correspond to which update timing among a plurality of different update timings. There is no need to perform processing to determine whether it is information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing performed by the LSI 85 for effect using the aggregated drawing list.

Using display order priority data for specifying the setting order of image data in the frame areas 114, 115, 117, and 118 in the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97, the image data specified to be used is It is specified which display device 41, 43, 44 corresponds to. This eliminates the need to set dedicated information for specifying the types of display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set in the aggregated drawing list, thereby reducing the number of types of information set in the aggregated drawing list. becomes possible.

The image data corresponding to the main display device 41 is set to a value less than the first display target reference value as display order priority data, and the image data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 is set as display order priority data to a value less than the first display target reference value. A value greater than or equal to the second display target reference value is set, and a value greater than or equal to the second display target reference value is set for the image data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 as display order priority data. As a result, in a configuration in which the display order priority data is used to specify the type of display device 41, 43, 44 to be set, the image data designated as the target for use can be applied to any of the display devices 41, 43, 44. Compatibility is clearly distinguished in the display order priority data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the types of display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set in the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97.

In the configuration where the production CPU 82 creates a drawing list based on the information set in the execution target table for display control, the display order priority data is not set as is in the execution target table for display control. , frame areas 114, 115, 117, in the display target data corresponding to the type of display device 41, 43, 44 to be set and the plurality of types of image data to be used in the display device 41, 43, 44. Display order data corresponding to the setting order to 118 is set, and display order priority data is derived using these display target data and display order data. As a result, when setting an execution target table for display control at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the types of display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set and the plurality of display devices to be used in the display devices 41, 43, 44 are determined. It is only necessary to set the setting order among the types of image data, and there is no need to set the final display order priority data. Therefore, design work is facilitated.

For the image data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43, the value resulting from adding the first display target reference value to the display order data is derived as display order priority data, and the image data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 is derived as display order priority data. Regarding the data, the value resulting from adding the second display target reference value to the display order data is derived as the display order priority data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the display order priority data.

<Configuration related to display output to each sub-display device 43, 44>
Next, a configuration for outputting image signals to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 will be described.

As already explained, the LSI 85 for presentation is provided with the second display circuit 99 as a circuit for outputting image signals to each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for outputting image signals to each sub-display device 43, 44. As shown in FIG. 38, the second display circuit 99 is provided with a first output section 131 and a second output section 132. The first output section 131 outputs an image signal to the first sub display device 43, and the second output section 132 outputs an image signal to the second sub display device 44. When outputting these image signals, among the first sub frame area 117 and the second sub frame area 118 provided in the register 93 of the production LSI 85, the frame area 117 to which the current image signal is output, The drawing data created in step 118 is referred to. In this case, only one sub-first frame area 117 and one sub-second frame area 118 are provided, and since the double buffer system is adopted as already explained, the sub-first frame area In a situation where a drawing signal is being output to each sub display device 43, 44 based on the drawing data created in one of the frame areas 117 and 118 for sub second frame area, the next update timing is displayed in the other frame area. Drawing data for displaying the image is created. In other words, one piece of drawing data created in one frame area 117, 118 causes one frame's worth of image to be displayed on the first sub-display device 43, and also displays one frame's worth of image on the second sub-display device 44. is displayed.

FIG. 39 shows how one piece of drawing data is created in order to display one frame of image on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and how each sub-display device 43 is created using that one drawing data. , 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how one frame's worth of images is displayed on each of. Note that in FIG. 39, only one piece of image data is used to display one frame's worth of images on the first sub-display device 43, and only one piece of image data is used to display one frame's worth of images on the second sub-display device 44. The case where only one piece of image data is used will be described, but the same applies to the case where a plurality of pieces of image data are used to display one frame of image on each sub-display device 43, 44. .

The data shown in FIG. 39(a) is data that simply represents the image data 133 for displaying one frame of image on the first sub-display device 43, and the data shown in FIG. This data is a simplified representation of image data 134 for displaying one frame's worth of images on the sub display device 44. As described above, these image data 133 and 134 are stored in advance in the memory module 83, and in the state stored in the memory module 83, these image data 133 and 134 exist as individual data. These image data 133 and 134 are image data for 2D images, and are set as rectangular data having a plurality of pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. In the following description, the image data 133 will be referred to as first sub-image data 133, and the image data 134 will be referred to as second sub-image data 134.

FIG. 39(c) is a diagram schematically showing one frame area 117, 118 in which one piece of drawing data is created for displaying one frame's worth of images on each of the sub-display devices 43, 44. be. Each frame area 117, 118 is set as a rectangular data area in which a plurality of dots exist in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. In this case, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame areas 117, 118 corresponds to the number of dots in the vertical direction of each sub-display device 43, 44 in the situation where each sub-display device 43, 44 is arranged at the initial position. There is. Specifically, the number of dots in the vertical direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is determined by the predetermined number of dots in the vertical direction of the sub display devices 43 and 44 in a situation where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position. It matches the value obtained by integrating the number (specifically, "1"). Note that the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are display devices with the same number of dots, and there is a situation in which both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged at the initial position. The number of dots in the vertical direction of each sub-display device 43, 44 is the same, and the number of dots in the horizontal direction of each sub-display device 43, 44 is also the same.

On the other hand, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117, 118 is the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub-display device 43 in the situation where each sub-display device 43, 44 is arranged at the initial position, and the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the second sub-display device. This corresponds to the sum of 44 horizontal dots. Specifically, the number of dots in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 is equal to the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the first sub-display device 43 and the second It matches the value obtained by multiplying the number of dots in the horizontal direction of the sub-display device 44 by the predetermined number (specifically, "1").

By setting the number of dots in the frame areas 117 and 118 as described above, the drawing data for displaying one frame's worth of images on the first sub-display device 43 and the drawing data for displaying one frame's worth of images on the second sub-display device 44. Both the drawing data for displaying the image and the drawing data can be created in one frame area 117, 118.

In detail, regarding the settings of the first sub-image data 133 and the second sub-image data 134 in the frame areas 117 and 118, the first sub-image data 133 has a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions, as described above. Therefore, the first sub-image data 133 has a plurality of vertical lines each consisting of a plurality of dots arranged in the vertical direction, which are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, as shown in FIG. 39(a). Similarly, as already explained, the second sub-image data 134 has a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions, so the second sub-image data 134 is arranged vertically as shown in FIG. 39(b). This means that a plurality of vertical lines consisting of a plurality of dots are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 39(c), since the frame areas 117 and 118 have a plurality of dots in each of the vertical and horizontal directions as described above, a vertical line made up of a plurality of dots lined up in the vertical direction is This means that multiple devices are installed in parallel.

In this configuration, the data of each vertical line of the first sub-image data 133 is set in a distributed manner in the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 in the horizontal direction. In this case, the data of each vertical line in the first sub-image data 133 is arranged in odd-numbered horizontal lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 while maintaining the horizontal arrangement order in the first sub-image data 133. It is set as a vertical line. Furthermore, the data of each vertical line of the second sub-image data 134 is set to be distributed among the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 in the horizontal direction. In this case, the data of each vertical line in the second sub-image data 134 is arranged in the even-numbered horizontal line in the frame areas 117 and 118 while maintaining the horizontal arrangement order in the second sub-image data 134. It is set as a vertical line.

The image signals corresponding to the data set in the odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 are outputted by the first output section 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the respective corresponding dots on the first sub-display device 43. Ru. Further, the image signals corresponding to the data set in the even-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118 are transmitted to the respective corresponding dots on the second sub-display device 44 by the second output section 132 of the second display circuit 99. is output to. As a result, data corresponding to the image signal output to the first sub-display device 43 becomes data as shown in FIG. 39(d), and data corresponding to the image signal output to the second sub-display device 44 becomes data as shown in FIG. The data will be as shown in 39(e).

The output of the image signal to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 in the second display circuit 99 is synchronized with the clock signal input to the second display circuit 99 from the clock circuit provided in the presentation LSI 85. It will be done. Specifically, in response to one pulse signal received as a clock signal, the second display circuit 99 displays an image corresponding to one dot existing on an odd-numbered vertical line in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117 and 118. A signal is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot arranged in a predetermined horizontal direction with respect to the one dot is output to the second sub-display device 44. More specifically, at the output timing of the first image signal for the drawing data created in the frame areas 117 and 118, the image signal corresponding to one dot existing in the upper left corner of the frame areas 117 and 118 in FIG. 39(c) is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot arranged to the right of the one dot is output to the second sub-display device 44. At the next output timing of the image signal, it corresponds to the odd-numbered dot in the horizontal direction among the two dots arranged in parallel to the right of the two dots to which the image signal was output at the first output timing. An image signal is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to an even-numbered dot is output to the second sub-display device 44. Thereafter, after the output of the image signal for one line in the horizontal direction is completed, the image signal is outputted for one line in the horizontal direction one step below from the left side, two dots at a time.

The manner in which the image signal is output to each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 will be explained while showing the relationship with the timing at which the image signal is output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41. FIG. 40 is a time chart showing how image signals are output to each display device 41, 43, 44, and FIG. 40(b) shows the period during which the image signal is outputted from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41, and FIG. 40(c) shows the output mode of the clock signal outputted to the second display circuit 99. 40(d) shows a period during which an image signal is output from the second display circuit 99 to the second sub-display device 44. FIG.

At timing t1, output of a pulse signal as a clock signal to the first display circuit 98 and the second display circuit 99 is started as shown in FIG. 40(a). In this case, at the timing t1, output of an image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 is started from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 as shown in FIG. 40(b). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 40(c), the first output section 131 of the second display circuit 99 starts outputting an image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117, 118 to the first sub-display device 43. Ru.

Thereafter, at timing t2, when the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114 and 115 continues to be output from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41, as shown in FIG. 40(c). Thus, the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117 and 118 from the first output section 131 of the second display circuit 99 to the first sub-display device 43 is completed. Then, at the timing t2, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is sent from the second output section 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub-display device 44, as shown in FIG. 40(d). Signal output begins.

Thereafter, at timing t3, the output of one pulse of the clock signal is terminated, as shown in FIG. 40(a). In this case, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 114, 115 from the first display circuit 98 to the main display device 41 is completed, and As shown in FIG. 40(d), the output of the image signal corresponding to one dot of the frame areas 117, 118 from the second output section 132 of the second display circuit 99 to the second sub-display device 44 is completed.

Thereafter, the same signal output as the timing from t1 to t3 is repeated at each of the timings from t4 to t6, the timing from t7 to t9, and the timing from t10 to t12. Then, by outputting each image signal in synchronization with the output of the pulse signal in the clock signal as described above, the main display is performed using one piece of drawing data created in one frame area 114, 115. While the image for one frame is updated in the device 41, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are displayed using one piece of drawing data created in one frame area 117, 118. In each of these, one frame worth of images is updated.

Note that when one dot in the frame areas 114, 115 corresponds to one dot on the main display device 41, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 114, 115 is output for one dot on the main display device 41. This is performed during the output period of one pulse of the clock signal, and if one dot in the frame areas 114, 115 corresponds to multiple dots on the main display device 41, the display of the frame areas 114, 115 for the multiple dots on the main display device 41 is performed. The image signal corresponding to one dot is output during the output period of one pulse of the clock signal. Furthermore, if one dot in the frame areas 117, 118 corresponds to one dot in the first sub-display device 43, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117, 118 for one dot in the first sub-display device 43 If the signal is output during the output period that is half of one pulse of the clock signal, and one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots on the first sub-display device 43, the first sub-display device 43 An image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 for the plurality of dots is output in an output period that is half of one pulse of the clock signal. Furthermore, if one dot in the frame areas 117, 118 corresponds to one dot in the second sub-display device 44, an image corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117, 118 for one dot in the second sub-display device 44 If the signal is output during the output period that is half of one pulse of the clock signal, and one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 corresponds to a plurality of dots on the second sub-display device 44, the second sub-display device 44 An image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 for the plurality of dots is output in an output period that is half of one pulse of the clock signal.

As described above, the drawing data for displaying one frame's worth of images on the first sub-display device 43 and the drawing data for displaying one frame's worth of images on the second sub-display device 44 are in one frame area. 117 and 118, the number of frame areas 117 and 118 can be reduced compared to a configuration in which drawing data corresponding to each sub display device 43 and 44 is created in separate frame areas. It is possible to suppress it.

In response to input of one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117, 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to another one dot in the frame areas 117, 118 is output. The image signal is output to the second sub-display device 44. As a result, the timing at which updating of one frame's worth of images on the first sub-display device 43 is completed and the timing at which updating of one frame's worth of images on the second sub-display device 44 is completed are approximately the same timing. becomes possible. Therefore, the timing at which updating of one frame's worth of images for one of the first sub-display device 43 and second sub-display device 44 is completed is longer than the timing at which updating of one frame's worth of images for the other one is completed. It is possible to prevent it from shifting.

Drawing data for displaying one frame's worth of images on the first sub-display device 43 is set in odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118, and at the same time, drawing data for displaying one frame's worth of images on the second sub-display device 44 is set. Drawing data for display is set in even-numbered vertical lines in frame areas 117 and 118. As a result, when outputting image signals from the frame areas 117, 118 to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117, 118 is output to the first sub display device 43. Since it is only necessary to output the image signal adjacent to that one dot to the second sub-display device 44, the processing configuration for specifying the type of dot to which the image signal is output is simplified. It becomes possible to do so.

A processing configuration that enables the output of the image signal as described above will be described below. First, the write process executed by the 2D control unit 96 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. Note that the writing process is executed in step S705 in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19).

In the writing process, the display order priority data set in the drawing list for the image data to be written this time is specified, and the value of the specified display order priority data is set to "100", which is the first display target reference value. ” (step S1401). If the value of the display order priority data is less than the first display target reference value "100" (step S1401: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the main display device 41. Since this means that the image data is to be created, a process is executed to draw the image data to be written this time in the 2D drawing area 112 in the main display drawing area 111 of the register 93 ( Step S1402). As already explained, the 2D drawing area 112 is an area for creating drawing data for a 2D image among the drawing data for displaying one frame worth of images on the main display device 41.

On the other hand, if the value of the display order priority data is equal to or greater than the first display target reference value "100" (step S1401: NO), the image data to be written this time is one of the sub display devices 43, Since this means that the image data is the image data for creating the drawing data corresponding to 44, a drawing process is executed in the sub-display drawing area 116 in the register 93 (step S1403). FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the drawing process.

First, identify the display order priority data set in the drawing list for the image data to be written this time, and if the value of the identified display order priority data is less than "200" which is the second display target reference value. It is determined whether there is one (step S1501). If the value of the display order priority data is less than the second display target reference value "200" (step S1501: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 This means that it is image data for creating. In this case, first, a setting process is executed for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 (step S1502). The drawing number counter is a counter used by the 2D control unit 96 to specify how many vertical lines exist in the horizontal direction when each vertical line is one unit for the current image data. In step S1502, the direction in which the image data is drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 is specified based on the rotation angle parameter set for the image data to be written this time, and in that direction, a vertical line is drawn. The number of lines is derived by calculation. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the drawing number counter.

Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the current drawing count counter value is extracted from the image data to be written this time (step S1503). In addition, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 that are the drawing targets, the coordinate parameters and the drawing number counter that are set for the image data that is the current writing target are also displayed. A vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the vertical line data extracted in step S1503 is drawn on the vertical line of the specified frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1504). In this case, depending on the contents of the coordinate parameters, even the vertical line data corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time exists in the middle position in the horizontal direction of the frame areas 117 and 118. It may also be drawn as a vertical line.

Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1506). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S1503 and S1504 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing in steps S1503 and S1504, the drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

If the value of the display order priority data is equal to or greater than the second display target reference value "200" (step S1501: YES), the image data to be written this time is the drawing data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44. This means that it is image data for creating. In this case, similarly to step S1502, a setting process for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S1507). Specifically, the direction in which the image data is drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 is specified based on the rotation angle parameter set for the image data to be written this time, and the The number of vertical lines is derived by calculation. Then, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines derived by the calculation is set in the drawing number counter.

Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the current drawing count counter value is extracted from the image data to be written this time (step S1508). In addition, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 that are the drawing targets, the coordinate parameters and the drawing number counter that are set for the image data that is the current writing target are also displayed. A vertical line corresponding to the current value is specified, and the vertical line data extracted in step S1508 is drawn on the vertical line of the specified frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1509). In this case, depending on the contents of the coordinate parameters, even the vertical line data corresponding to the leftmost position in the image data to be written this time exists in the middle position in the horizontal direction of the frame areas 117 and 118. It may also be drawn as a vertical line.

Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1510). Then, it is determined whether the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1511). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S1508 and S1509 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing in steps S1508 and S1509, drawing of the image data to be written this time in the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

Next, the signal output processing executed by the second display circuit 99 of the presentation LSI 85 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. Although the second display circuit 99 is provided as a dedicated circuit in which a circuit for executing signal output processing is preset, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display circuit 99 is provided with a circuit for executing signal output processing. The configuration may be provided as a general-purpose circuit that executes signal output processing using data. This also applies to the first display circuit 98.

When the output of the pulse signal from the clock circuit is started, the signal output timing is reached (step S1601: YES). When the signal output timing is reached, the abscissa update process is executed (step S1602). In the abscissa update process, if the current processing time is the first image signal output processing time for the drawing data that is the current image signal output target, the dot at the upper left corner of frame areas 117 and 118 is the image signal output processing time. Coordinate information is set so that the dot becomes the signal output target. On the other hand, if the current processing time is not the first image signal output processing time, the information on the abscissa of the current coordinate information is updated so as to shift to the right dot by one dot. In this case, the information on the ordinate among the coordinate information is maintained as is.

Furthermore, if the information on the abscissa is updated to shift one dot to the right and the information on the abscissa exceeds the maximum value of the abscissa (step S1603: YES), the information on the abscissa is shifted to the frame area by one dot. The information on the abscissa is cleared to "0" so that the information corresponds to the leftmost dot in 117 and 118 (step S1604). Further, the information on the ordinate is updated so that the information corresponds to a dot one level below the dot on the current ordinate in the frame areas 117 and 118 (step S1605).

Thereafter, the image signal set to the dot of the coordinate information as a result of this update is output from the first output unit 131 to the corresponding dot of the first sub-display device 43 (step S1606). The output period of this image signal is less than half the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. When the output of the image signal is completed (step S1607: YES), an abscissa update process is executed (step S1608). In the abscissa update process, information on the abscissa of the current coordinate information is updated so that it is shifted by one dot to the right. In this case, the information on the ordinate among the coordinate information is maintained as is. Thereafter, the image signal set to the dot of the coordinate information as a result of this update is output from the second output unit 132 to the corresponding dot of the second sub-display device 44 (step S1609). The output period of this image signal is less than half the output period of the pulse signal in the clock signal. When the output of the image signal is completed (step S1610: YES), the current processing round of signal output processing ends.

By executing the signal output processing as described above, each time one pulse signal is inputted as a clock signal to the second display circuit 99, as shown in the time chart of FIG. An image signal is output to the first sub-display device 43 and an image signal is output to the second sub-display device 44.

Here, as already explained, the main display device 41 is not displaceable, whereas each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is displaceably provided. Specifically, the first sub display device 43 is basically arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. 5, and during the execution period of the effect in which the first sub display device 43 is moved, They are arranged at display effect positions such as a first juxtaposition position as shown in FIG. 6(b) and a second juxtaposition position as shown in FIG. 6(b). Further, the second sub-display device 44 is basically arranged at the initial position as shown in FIG. 5, and during the execution period of the effect in which the second sub-display device 44 is moved, They are arranged at positions for display effects, such as a first juxtaposition position and a second juxtaposition position as shown in FIG. 6(b).

FIG. 44 shows an example of an execution target table for display control during the displacement effect period in which the effect of displacing the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is executed. In the displacement effect period shown in FIG. 44, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44 are initially placed in the initial position. Image display is performed on each of the two sub-display devices 44. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 display images corresponding to the initial position.

Thereafter, in a situation where the second sub-display device 44 is held at the initial position and the first sub-display device 43 is displaced or placed in a position for display production, the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device 44 are held at the initial position. Images are displayed on each of the display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 displays an image for display effect, while the second sub-display device 44 displays an image corresponding to being placed at the initial position.

Thereafter, in a situation where the first sub-display device 43 is placed at the initial position and the second sub-display device 44 is displaced or placed at a position for display production, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 44 Images are displayed on each of the display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. In this case, the first sub-display device 43 displays an image corresponding to the initial position, while the second sub-display device 44 displays an image for display effect.

Thereafter, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43 and Image display is performed on each of the two sub-display devices 44. In this case, images for display effects are displayed on both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44.

In the configuration in which the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are displaceably provided as described above, no matter which position each sub-display device 43, 44 is placed, In the frame areas 117 and 118 of the drawing area 116 for sub-display in the register 93, drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 and drawing data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 are stored in the frame areas 117 and 118 of the sub-display drawing area 116 at each update timing by the predetermined process described above. The drawing data is aggregated and created. Further, using the drawing data that has been aggregated and created, image signals are output to each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 through the predetermined processing described above. This eliminates the need to switch the processing configuration for creating drawing data and the processing configuration for outputting image signals depending on the position of each sub-display device 43, 44, so that the processing configuration can be simplified. It becomes possible.

<Effects of configuration regarding display output to each sub-display device 43, 44>
Drawing data (hereinafter also referred to as first drawing data) for displaying one frame's worth of images on the first sub-display device 43 and drawing data (hereinafter also referred to as "first drawing data") for displaying one frame's worth of images on the second sub-display device 44 (hereinafter also referred to as second drawing data) are collectively created for one frame area 117, 118, so that the drawing data corresponding to each sub display device 43, 44 is created in a separate frame area. Compared to the created configuration, it is possible to suppress the number of frame areas 117 and 118. This makes it possible to display images on the plurality of sub-display devices 43 and 44 while simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the frame areas 117 and 118.

A state is reached in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set in one frame area 117, 118 at the same time. This makes it possible to overlap the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data.

Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used at the same update timing are set in one frame area 117, 118. This eliminates the need to use the first drawing data and the second drawing data set in one frame area 117 and 118 individually at different update timings, reducing the processing load on the second display circuit 99. becomes possible.

Drawing data for displaying one frame's worth of images on the first sub-display device 43 is set in odd-numbered vertical lines in the frame areas 117 and 118, and one frame's worth of images is displayed on the second sub-display device 44. Drawing data for display is set in even-numbered vertical lines in frame areas 117 and 118. As a result, when outputting image signals from the frame areas 117 and 118 to the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, the image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117 and 118 is output to the first sub display device 43. Since it is only necessary to output the image signal adjacent to the dot to the second sub-display device 44, the processing configuration for specifying the type of dot to which the image signal is output is simplified. It becomes possible to do so.

In response to input of one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the frame areas 117, 118 is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to another one dot in the frame areas 117, 118 is output. The image signal is output to the second sub-display device 44. As a result, the timing at which updating of one frame's worth of images on the first sub-display device 43 is completed and the timing at which updating of one frame's worth of images on the second sub-display device 44 is completed are approximately the same timing. becomes possible. Therefore, the timing at which updating of one frame's worth of images for one of the first sub-display device 43 and second sub-display device 44 is completed is longer than the timing at which updating of one frame's worth of images for the other one is completed. It is possible to prevent it from shifting.

<Configuration for displaying right-handed hitting notification images 141, 143>
Next, a configuration for displaying the right-handed hitting notification images 141, 143 on each display device 41, 43, 44 will be described.

As already explained, in the game area PA, the special electric prize winning device 32 is provided in the right side area when the center frame 42 is taken as a reference. Therefore, in order to generate a prize in the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, it is necessary to perform a firing operation so that the game ball flows down the right side area. In this case, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 display a right-handed notification image indicating that a firing operation should be performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area of the game area PA. is displayed.

FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of right-handed hitting notification images 141, 143 displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44. As shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), in the main display device 41, a right-handed notification image 141 on the main side extends horizontally at an intermediate position in the vertical direction on the display surface of the main display device 41. The belt-shaped image 141a is displayed, and an instruction image 141b instructing the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed superimposed on the belt-shaped image 141a from the front. This right-handed notification image 141 on the main side is continuously displayed in the opening/closing execution mode, and the display position and display mode on the main display device 41 are constant. The main-side right-handed hitting notification image 141 is displayed using the main-side right-handed hitting image data group 142 stored in advance in the memory module 83, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 46(a).

In the opening/closing execution mode, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 may be arranged in the first juxtaposed position as shown in FIG. In some cases, the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged in a second juxtaposition position. When these sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the first side-by-side position or the second side-by-side position, a part of the area where the main side right-handed hitting notification image 141 is displayed on the main display device 41 The sub-display devices 43 and 44 face each other from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the visibility of the right-handed hitting notification image 141 on the main side will be reduced by the sub display devices 43 and 44. On the other hand, when the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at a position other than the initial position such as the first side-by-side position or the second side-by-side position in the opening/closing execution mode, the first sub-display device 43 and the second side-by-side position A right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed on each of the sub display devices 44. Note that when the first sub-display device 43 is placed at the initial position in the opening/closing execution mode, the sub-side right-hit notification image 143 is not displayed on the first sub-display device 43, and the opening/closing execution mode is not displayed. In the case where the second sub-display device 44 is placed at the initial position in the mode, the second sub-display device 44 does not display the sub-side right-hitting notification image 143.

One sub-side hitting-right notification image 143 is displayed on a portion of the display surface of the first sub-display device 43, and one is also displayed on a portion of the display surface of the second sub-display device 44. As shown in FIG. 46(a), the memory module 83 stores in advance the sub-side right-handed hitting image data 144, and when displaying the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the first sub display device 43, In any case where the second sub-display device 44 displays the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143, the sub-side right-handed hitting image data 144 is used.

The position where the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43 is the upper right corner part in the state of FIG. The display position of the image 143 is fixed at the same location even if the first sub-display device 43 is displaced. In other words, the upper right corner portion of the first sub display device 43 in the state of FIG. 45(a) becomes the lower right corner portion in the state of FIG. 45(b), but the Since the display position of the side right-handed hitting notification image 143 is fixed, the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 is displayed in the upper right corner of the first sub display device 43 in the state of FIG. 45(a). In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 45(b), it is displayed at the lower right corner of the first sub-display device 43.

Similarly, the position where the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the second sub-display device 44 is the lower left corner in the state of FIG. 45(a); The display position of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 is fixed at the same location even if the second sub-display device 44 is displaced. In other words, the lower left corner of the second sub display device 44 in the state of FIG. 45(a) becomes the upper left corner in the state of FIG. 45(b), but the sub side of the first sub display device 43 Since the display position of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 is fixed, the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed in the lower left corner of the second sub display device 44 in the state of FIG. 45(a). In the state shown in FIG. 45(b), it is displayed in the upper left corner of the second sub-display device 44.

By fixing the display position of the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 on each sub display device 43, 44 as described above, the display position of the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub display devices 43, 44 is determined. There is no need to switch the attached coordinate information depending on the displacement state of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for displaying the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side.

Furthermore, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first juxtaposed position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged vertically, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged on the upper side as shown in FIG. 45(a). A sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 is displayed at the top of the first sub-display device 43, and a sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 is displayed at the bottom of the second sub-display device 44 located below. is displayed. Furthermore, when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the second juxtaposed position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged on the left side as shown in FIG. 45(b). At the top of the second sub-display device 44, a sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 is displayed, and at the same time, at the bottom of the first sub-display device 43 located on the right side, a sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 is displayed. Is displayed. In other words, regardless of whether the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged in parallel, the upper and lower display areas are A right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed at each position. Thereby, it is possible to improve the visibility of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side regardless of whether the player is placed in either the first juxtaposition position or the second juxtaposition position.

Each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is driven and controlled so that in the opening/closing execution mode, a state in which the sub-display devices are arranged in the first juxtaposition position and a state in which they are disposed in the second juxtaposition position are alternately repeated. As a result, a situation in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate clockwise and a situation in which they rotate counterclockwise in an integrated state is alternately repeated. On the other hand, the sub-side hitting-right notification image 143 makes it easy for the player to understand the content of the right-handed hitting instruction, regardless of which rotational position the sub display devices 43 and 44 are placed in. It is an image.

FIGS. 46(b) and 46(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content displayed as the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side. As shown in FIGS. 46(b) and 46(c), the outer edge of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is annular, and the continuous instruction image 143a is displayed in the width part of the annular shape. . The continuous instruction image 143a consists of two character images "Right hit" and two arrow images, and the arrow images exist on both sides of the character image, and the character images exist on both sides of the arrow image. arranged in a ring. In this case, one character image and one character image are arranged to face each other with the center of the ring in between, and are arranged so that the upper side of each character image is on the outer periphery side. As a result, even if the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is placed at a rotational position such that one character image faces downward, the other character image will be displayed facing upward. Therefore, regardless of the rotational position of the right-handed player notification image 143 on the sub-side, the player can easily understand the content of the character image.

Further, the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 has a fixed display position on each sub-display device 43, 44, and rotates in a certain direction (specifically, is displayed rotating to the right (clockwise). As a result, regardless of the position where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are placed, the timing at which the sub-side hit-right notification image 143 is displayed reliably occurs at a rotational position where the player can easily grasp the content of the character image. I will do it.

In a configuration in which the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed so as to rotate in a constant direction, the rotation speed thereof is changed according to the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44. A manner in which the rotation speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is changed in accordance with the displacement state of the sub display devices 43 and 44 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 47. FIG. 47(a) shows a period in which right-handed hitting notification is executed on each display device 41, 43, and 44, and FIG. 47(b) shows a period during which right-handed hitting notification image 141 on the main side is displayed on the main display device 41. FIG. 47(c) shows a period in which the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed on the sub-display devices 43, 44, and FIG. 47(d) shows the period in which the sub-display devices 43, 44 are displayed in the clockwise direction or Indicates a period of rotation in a counterclockwise direction.

At timing t1, it is the timing to start the right-handed hit notification as shown in FIG. 47(a). In this case, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the main display device 41 starts displaying the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side, and as shown in FIG. The display devices 43 and 44 start displaying the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side.

Here, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is displayed to rotate clockwise as already explained, and its rotation speed is a first speed, a second speed faster than the first speed, There is a third speed faster than the second speed. The first speed, which is the lowest speed, is the speed that is set when the integrated body of each sub-display device 43, 44 rotates clockwise, and the second speed, which is an intermediate speed, is the speed that is set when the integrated body of each sub-display device 43, 44 rotates clockwise. The third speed, which is the highest speed, is the speed set when the integral body of each sub-display device 43, 44 rotates counterclockwise. It is.

When the integrated body of each sub-display device 43, 44 rotates clockwise, the clockwise rotation speed of the right-hand hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side is set to the lowest first speed. When the integral parts of each sub-display device 43, 44 rotate in the same direction as the rotation direction of the right-handed player notification image 143, it becomes possible to relatively lower the rotation speed of the right-handed player notification image 143 on the sub side. . This makes it possible to prevent the rotation of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side from becoming faster than necessary.

When the integrated body of each sub-display device 43, 44 rotates in a counterclockwise direction, the clockwise rotation speed of the right-hand hit notification image 143 on the sub-side is set to the highest third speed, so that the sub-side When the integral part of each sub-display device 43, 44 rotates in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the right-handed hitting notification image 143, it is possible to relatively increase the rotation speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side. becomes. The rotational speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side is faster than the rotational speed when the integrated sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate in the opposite direction. This maintains a situation in which the player recognizes that the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is rotating clockwise even when the integrated sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate in opposite directions. It becomes possible to do so.

At timing t1, each sub-display device 43, 44 is not rotating as shown in FIG. 47(d). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is set to the second speed.

Thereafter, at timing t2, the integrated sub-display devices 43 and 44 start rotating clockwise as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is changed from the second speed to the first speed. This makes it possible to reduce the rotational speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side as the integrated sub display devices 43 and 44 start rotating clockwise.

Thereafter, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the rotation of the integrated sub-display devices 43 and 44 is stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotational speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side returns from the first speed to the second speed.

Thereafter, at timing t4, the integrated sub-display devices 43 and 44 start rotating counterclockwise as shown in FIG. 47(d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotation speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is changed from the second speed to the third speed. This makes it possible to accelerate the rotational speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side as the integrated sub display devices 43 and 44 start rotating counterclockwise.

Thereafter, at timing t5, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the rotation of the integrated sub-display devices 43 and 44 is stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the rotational speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side returns from the first speed to the second speed.

Thereafter, at timing t6, it is the timing to end the right-handed hit notification as shown in FIG. 47(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the display of the right-handed notification image 141 on the main side on the main display device 41 is ended, and as shown in FIG. 47(c), on each sub display device 43, 44, The display of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is ended.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for making it possible to display the above-mentioned sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the setting process for right-handed hitting notification executed by the performance CPU 82. Note that the setting process for right-handed hitting notification is executed in the display control task process of step S506 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

If it is the timing to start the right-handed hitting notification (step S1701: NO, step S1702: YES), a process for starting the display of the right-handed hitting notification image 141 on the main side is executed (step S1703). In this process, the main side right-handed hitting image data group 142 is displayed so that the main side right-handed hitting notification image 141 as shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b) starts to be displayed on the main display device 41. At the same time, the parameter information to be applied this time to the right-handed image data group 142 on the main side is derived.

Thereafter, processing for setting coordinate information for the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is executed (step S1704). In this process, the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed in a predetermined corner portion of the first sub-display device 43, and the sub-side right-handed notification image 143 is displayed in a predetermined corner portion of the second sub-display device 44. Two pieces of fixed coordinate information corresponding to each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are derived so that the right-handed hitting notification image 143 is displayed. In addition, in this process, in order to display the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the first sub-display device 43, a use instruction is set for one sub-side right-handed hitting image data 144, and the second sub-display In order to display the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the device 44, a use instruction is set for one piece of sub-side right-handed hitting image data 144. Further, in step S1705, parameter information other than the coordinate information to be applied to the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 is derived, and parameter information used for the second sub-display device 44 is derived. Parameter information other than the coordinate information to be applied to the right-handed image data 144 on the sub-side is derived.

Drawing data is created according to the drawing list in which the information derived in steps S1703 to S1705 is set, and an image signal is output according to the drawing data, so that the main display device 41 displays the main side right-hand hit notification. At the same time as the display of the image 141 is started, the display of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side is started on each of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44.

If it is the right-handed hitting notification execution period (step S1701: YES), update processing of the right-handed hitting notification image 141 on the main side is executed (step S1706). In this process, parameter information is derived for displaying the main-side right-handed hitting notification image 141 at an update timing corresponding to the current update instruction. By displaying images according to the drawing list in which the parameter information is set, the display content of the main-side right-handed hitting notification image 141 on the main display device 41 is updated.

Thereafter, similarly to step S1704, processing for setting coordinate information for the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is executed (step S1707). In this process, the same coordinate information derived in step S1704 is used for the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 and for the second sub-display device 44. Each of the sub-side right-handed image data 144 is derived. As a result, the display position of the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the first sub-display device 43 is fixed, and the display position of the sub-side right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the second sub-display device 44 is fixed.

After that, if it is not the rotation period of the integral part of the sub display devices 43, 44 (step S1708: NO), the rotation speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side displayed on each sub display device 43, 44 is set to the second speed. The rotation information for making the rotation information as shown in FIG. The rotation information is derived to be applied to each of the data 144 (step S1709). By displaying images according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub side is rotated at the second rotation speed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. will be displayed.

If it is the rotation period of the integrated sub-display devices 43 and 44 and the rotation direction is clockwise (step S1708 and step S1709: YES), a first update process of rotation information at the time of rotation is executed (step S1711). In the first update process, the rotation information for making the rotation speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side displayed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 become the first speed is transferred to the first sub display device 43. The rotation information is derived as rotation information applied to each of the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the sub-side right-handed image data 144 and the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub display device 44 . By displaying images according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the right-hand hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is rotated at the first rotation speed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. will be displayed.

If it is the rotation period of the integrated sub-display devices 43 and 44 and the rotation direction is counterclockwise (step S1708: YES, step S1710: NO), a second update process of rotation information at the time of rotation is executed. (Step S1712). In the second update process, the rotation information for making the rotation speed of the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub side displayed on each sub display device 43 and 44 become the third speed is transferred to the first sub display device 43. The rotation information is derived as rotation information applied to each of the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the sub-side right-handed image data 144 and the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the second sub display device 44 . By displaying images according to the drawing list in which the rotation information is set, the right-hand hitting notification image 143 on the sub side is rotated at the third rotation speed on each of the sub display devices 43 and 44. will be displayed.

When any one of steps S1709, S1711, and S1712 is executed, other parameter setting processes are executed (step S1713). In this process, parameter information other than coordinate information and rotation information to be applied to the sub-side right-handed image data 144 used for the first sub-display device 43 is derived, and parameter information for the second sub-display device 44 is derived. Parameter information other than the coordinate information and rotation information to be applied to the right-handed image data 144 on the sub-side to be used is derived.

<Effects of configuration for displaying right-handed hitting notification images 141 and 143>
A rotation operation is performed in the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44. This makes it possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, in the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side, continuous instruction images 143a are arranged in a ring shape. This makes it possible for the player to recognize the content of the continuous instruction image 143a for notification even when the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

On the sub-display devices 43 and 44, the sub-side hitting-right notification image 143 is displayed as if it were rotating. Thereby, regardless of the rotational position of the sub-display devices 43, 44, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the right-handed hitting notification image 143 on the sub-side in a predetermined display orientation.

Since the rotation speed of the sub-side hit-right notification image 143 is changed depending on the operating mode of the rotational operation in the sub display devices 43 and 44, it is not possible to determine which mode the rotational operation is in the sub display devices 43 and 44. Even so, it is possible to make the display content of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub-side easy for the player to recognize.

<Configuration for displaying rotation period image 153>
Next, a configuration for displaying the rotation period image 153 on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 will be described.

As already explained, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are displaceably provided, and the first juxtaposition position where each sub-display device 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction and the first juxtaposition position where each sub-display device 43 and 44 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction It is possible to rotate between a second juxtaposed position and a second juxtaposed position. In this case, when each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotates from the first side-by-side position to the second side-by-side position, each of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 A rotation period image 153 is displayed to make it difficult for the player to understand that the integral part of each sub-display device 43, 44 is rotating.

FIGS. 49(a) to 49(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the effect using the rotation period image 153. In a situation where both the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are placed at the initial position, the timing to start moving to the juxtaposed position is reached, so that the timing shown in FIGS. 49(a) and 49(b) As shown, the movement of each sub-display device 43, 44 toward the first juxtaposition position is started. During this moving period, images that have continuity with the main display device 41 are not displayed on the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44, and the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44, the corresponding moving period images 151 are displayed. By displaying the movement period images 151 individually corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 in this way, each of the sub display devices 43 and 44 moves from the initial position to the first juxtaposition position. The player can clearly understand what is being done. Note that the drive control for displacing each sub-display device 43, 44 is executed by the distribution side MPU 73 as already explained.

Thereafter, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first juxtaposition position at the same time, so that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 49(b). As a result, a series of display surfaces are formed. The state in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first juxtaposition position is maintained over the juxtaposition display period. During this juxtaposition display period, a juxtaposition period image 152 such as a predetermined character image is displayed on a series of display surfaces formed by each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. The juxtaposed period image 152 is displayed across the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the two sub-display devices 43 and 44 . Note that in an area of the main display device 41 that does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44, an image 152 for a parallel period different from the image 152 for a parallel period displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 is displayed. be done.

Thereafter, as the side-by-side display period elapses, the integrated parts of each sub-display device 43 and 44 rotate clockwise while maintaining the state in which they form a series of display surfaces, and these integrated parts simultaneously display the second side-by-side display screen. placed in position. During this rotation period, the rotation period image 153 is displayed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44, as shown in FIGS. 49(c) and 49(d). Ru. The rotation period image 153 is displayed on both the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43 so as to straddle the boundary between the main display device 41 and the first sub display device 43. The image is displayed on both the main display device 41 and the second sub-display device 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the display device 41 and the second sub-display device 44 . Further, the rotation period image 153 is displayed across both the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 . Furthermore, the display mode of the rotation period image 153 displayed on each of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 is based on the rotation of the integral part of each sub-display device 43, 44. The display mode is such that it is independent of position. Specifically, the outer edge portion of the integral body of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 that forms a boundary with a predetermined area of the main display device 41 changes as the integral body rotates. The display content of the image portion that is displayed on both the predetermined area and the sub-display devices 43, 44 at a certain timing is displayed on both the predetermined area and the sub-display devices 43, 44 at a previous timing in the rotation period. The rotation period image 153 is displayed so that the display content has continuity with the image portion that has been displayed throughout. As a result, one display surface is formed by the area of the main display device 41 that does not face each sub display device 43, 44 and the display surface of each sub display device 43, 44, and the one display surface is fixed. A rotation period image 153 that the player recognizes as a screen is displayed on the one display screen. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the integrated sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

Thereafter, as the rotation period elapses, a separation period occurs in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are separated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 49(e). During the separation period, images having continuity with the main display device 41 are not displayed on each of the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44; Separation period images 154 corresponding to each of the sub-display devices 44 and 44 are displayed. By displaying the separation period images 154 individually corresponding to each display device 41, 43, 44 in this way, each sub display device 43, 44 moves from the second juxtaposed position to the separation position. It becomes possible to make the player understand that the player is moving.

Here, as already explained, during the rotation period, the rotation period image 153 is displayed on each display device 41 so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the integral part of each sub display device 43, 44 is rotating. , 43, and 44, respectively. In this case, the player recognizes that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are placed in the first juxtaposition position, even though they are actually placed in the second juxtaposition position. A situation may arise where this is the case. When each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 starts moving toward the separation position in such a situation, it is thought that the player will find the movement surprising. By providing such unexpectedness, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image display.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for displaying images as described above in each of the movement period, juxtaposed display period, rotation period, and separation period will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating a rotational movement display setting process executed by the presentation CPU 82. Note that the rotational movement display setting process is executed in the display control task process of step S506 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

If it is the period of movement to the parallel position (step S1801: YES), the use settings of various image data for displaying the movement period image 151 on each display device 41, 43, 44 are set, and the various image data are used. Various parameter information to be applied to the image data is derived (steps S1802 to S1804). The moving period image 151 is displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44 by creating drawing data according to the drawing list set with the information derived here and outputting an image signal according to the drawing data. be done.

If it is the juxtaposition display period (step S1805: YES), use settings of various image data for displaying the juxtaposition display period image 152 on each display device 41, 43, 44 are made, and the various images are Various parameter information to be applied to the data is derived (steps S1806 to S1808). By creating drawing data according to the drawing list set with the information derived here and outputting an image signal according to the drawing data, the image 152 for the parallel display period is displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44. is displayed.

If it is the rotation period (step S1809: YES), one display surface (hereinafter referred to as , the use setting of various image data for displaying the rotation period image 153 over the entirety of the image 153 for the rotation period (also referred to as the aggregated display surface), and deriving various parameter information to be applied to the various image data (steps S1810 to S1810). S1812). The rotation period image 153 is displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44 by creating drawing data according to the drawing list set with the information derived here and outputting an image signal according to the drawing data. be done.

Here, a method for creating image data 156 to 158 for displaying rotation period image 153 at the design stage of pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 51. When creating the image data 156 to 158, a plurality of 2D image data 155 are first created for displaying a moving image over the entire aggregated display surface during the rotation period. The plurality of 2D image data 155 are created in one-to-one correspondence with each update timing included in the rotation period. Thereafter, from each of the 2D image data 155, image data 156 corresponding to each of the display range of the main display device 41, the display range of the first sub display device 43, and the display range of the second sub display device 44 at the corresponding update timing is extracted. -Cut out 158.

To explain the contents of the image data 156 to 158 for displaying the rotation period image 153 shown in FIG. 49(c), the 2D image data 155 for displaying the rotation period image 153 shown in FIG. First, create it (see FIG. 51(a)). When a data range corresponding to the display range of the main display device 41 is cut out from this 2D image data 155, the portion displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44 becomes blank data as shown in FIG. For the portion, image data 156 for displaying the rotation period image 153 is obtained. The blank data includes data for setting blank color information such as black. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the 2D image data 155 is used as it is as the image data 156 for the main display device 41. In this case, even if a failure occurs in the drive mechanism of the sub-display devices 43, 44 and at least one of the sub-display devices 43, 44 is not placed in the side-by-side position, the sub-display devices 43, 44 The image that should originally be displayed will be displayed on the main display device 41.

When a data range corresponding to the display range by the first sub-display device 43 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, an image for displaying the rotation period image 153 on the first sub-display device 43 as shown in FIG. 51(c) is obtained. Data 157 is obtained. Moreover, when a data range corresponding to the display range by the second sub-display device 44 is cut out from the 2D image data 155, the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the second sub-display device 44 as shown in FIG. 51(d). image data 158 is obtained.

After cutting out the various image data 156 to 158 as described above, the various image data 156 to 158 are changed into a data format compatible with the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be used. Specifically, the resolution of the main display device 41 is 800×600, while the resolution of both the first sub display device 43 and the second sub display device 44 is 572×180. Therefore, the image data 156 corresponding to the main display device 41 is adjusted to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution of the main display device 41, and the image data 157 and 158 corresponding to the sub display devices 43 and 44 are adjusted to the number of pixels corresponding to the resolution of the sub display device 41. , 44 pixels.

Furthermore, while the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 3D image on the main display device 41, the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a 2D image on the sub display devices 43 and 44. In this case, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the main display device 41, the image data 156 is used as texture data pasted on the plate-shaped polygon. On the other hand, when the rotation period image 153 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44, the image data 157 and 158 are used as sprite data. Therefore, adjustments are made to accommodate these data formats.

The image data 156 to 158 corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 as described above are created at each update timing in the rotation period. Therefore, as the image data for displaying the rotation period image 153 in the memory module 83, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. A second image data group 162 for the display device 43 and a third image data group 163 for the second sub-display device 44 are stored. Each of these first to third image data groups 161 to 163 includes a number of image data corresponding to the number of update timings included in the rotation period. The presentation LSI 85 reads and uses image data corresponding to each update timing from the first to third image data groups 161 to 163 during the rotation period.

Returning to the description of the rotational movement display setting process (FIG. 50), if it is a separation period (step S1813: YES), various images are displayed for displaying the separation period image 154 on each display device 41, 43, 44. Data use settings are made, and various parameter information to be applied to the various image data is derived (steps S1814 to S1816). Drawing data is created according to the drawing list set with the information derived here, and an image signal is output according to the drawing data, so that the separation period image 154 is displayed on each display device 41, 43, 44. be done.

<Effects of the configuration for displaying the rotation period image 153>
During the rotation period in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the rotation period image 153 is displayed as a sub It is displayed on display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating without the player noticing, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The rotation period image 153 is an image that has no directionality in the direction along the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43 and 44. Thereby, in a situation where the sub display devices 43, 44 are performing a rotation operation, by displaying the rotation period image 153 on the sub display devices 43, 44, it is possible to confirm that the sub display devices 43, 44 are performing the rotation operation. It becomes possible to make it difficult for players to identify.

The rotation period image 153 is displayed so that the player recognizes that it is displayed on a non-rotating display surface without following the rotation operation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44. This makes it difficult for the player to discern that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

In a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, a portion of the display surface of the main display device 41 exists around the display surface of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and a portion of the display surface In the area, an image corresponding to the rotation period image 153 on the sub display devices 43 and 44 is displayed. This makes it possible to display an image related to the rotation period image 153 displayed on the sub-display devices 43, 44 around the sub-display devices 43, 44 that are performing the rotation operation, and It becomes possible to perform integrated display effects on the display device 41 and the sub-display devices 43 and 44.

In particular, in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the display surface of the main display device 41 exists over the entire periphery of the display surfaces of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 . This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the display surfaces of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are part of the display surface of the main display device 41, and the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate. It becomes easier to display an image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that there is a game player.

A continuous image is displayed on these display devices 41, 43, 44 so as to straddle the boundary between the display surface of the main display device 41 and the display surface of the sub display devices 43, 44. This makes it difficult for the player who is paying attention to these images to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

The rotational positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 differ depending on the timing at which the rotation period starts and the timing at which the rotation period ends. In this case, in a situation where the rotation period image 153 that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are rotating, the sub display devices 43 and 44 rotate and The rotational positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 are different. As a result, it is expected that the player will recognize that the rotational positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have been changed without realizing it, and it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

Before and after the rotation period, images that allow the player to easily recognize the rotational positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and during the rotation period, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 perform rotation operations. A rotation period image 153 that is difficult for the player to recognize is displayed on the sub-display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible to give the player a strong impression that the rotational positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have been changed without them noticing.

<Configuration for displaying abnormality notification image 176>
Next, a configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44 will be described.

In this pachinko machine 10, there are multiple types of events for which abnormality notification is to be executed. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining events that are targets of abnormality notification. As shown in Figure 52, the events that are subject to abnormality notification include magnet detection, radio wave detection, big prize opening abnormality detection, disconnection abnormality, game ball ejection abnormality, movable body abnormality, and full tank abnormality. , vibration detection, door opening, and frame opening. Magnet detection is an event in which a magnetic force detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 detects magnetic force. Radio wave detection is an event in which a radio wave detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 detects a radio wave. Detection of an abnormality in the special prize winning hole is an event in which the entry of a game ball into the special electric prize winning device 32 is detected in a situation that is not in the opening/closing execution mode. Disconnection abnormality means that the main MPU 62 receives connection confirmation signals from the winning detection sensors provided in the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and through gate 35. It refers to an event that does not occur. Game ball ejection abnormality is a phenomenon in which the ejection of game balls from the payout device 68 is not detected despite the drive control of the payout device 68 to pay out game balls. The movable body abnormality is a phenomenon in which the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 does not become open even though the electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is controlled to be in the open state. The full tank abnormality is a phenomenon in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls. Vibration detection is an event in which a vibration detection sensor (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 detects vibration. Door opening is an event in which the game machine main body 12 is in an open state. Frame opening is an event in which the front door frame 14 is in an open state.

When the above-mentioned event occurs, the display light emitting section 53 emits light for abnormality notification, and the speaker section 54 outputs abnormality notification sound. Furthermore, an abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44. In the abnormality notification image 176, an image corresponding to the type of event that triggered the execution of the abnormality notification is displayed, and specifically, characters indicating the type of the event are displayed. In this case, as already explained, the sub display devices 43 and 44 are displaceably provided, and as the sub display devices 43 and 44 are displaced, the main display device 41 becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Range changes. Accordingly, the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 differs depending on the position where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are arranged.

FIGS. 53(a) to 53(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176. In a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are both arranged at the initial position, the display surface of the main display device 41 is arranged at the upper and lower sides facing each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, as shown in FIG. 53(a). Most of the area is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, except for a part of the area. Therefore, in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged at the initial position, the display range 171 during non-operation, excluding a part of the upper and lower areas facing each sub-display device 43 and 44, is the abnormality information. This is the display range of the image 176.

The display range 171 during non-operation is set to be wide enough to simultaneously display seven abnormality notification images 176 of a predetermined size. On the other hand, as already explained, there are eight or more events for which abnormality notification is to be executed. In this case, if eight or more events for which abnormality notification is to be executed occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification image 176 cannot be displayed for some of the events. Therefore, priority levels are set for events that are the targets of abnormality notification, as shown in FIG. 52, and the events that are the targets of abnormality notification are selected according to the priorities.

The highest priority is set for the first event group, which corresponds to fraudulent acts that may cause a great disadvantage to the gaming hall. The first event group includes magnet detection, radio wave detection, and big prize opening abnormality detection. Next, a second group of events that may prevent the game from proceeding normally is given a high priority. The second event group includes a disconnection abnormality, a game ball ejection abnormality, a movable body abnormality, and a full tank abnormality. The third event group, which may occur during maintenance or the like even when the game is being played normally, is set to have the lowest priority. The third event group includes vibration detection, door opening, and frame opening.

As described above, the display range 171 during non-operation is set to a width that can display seven abnormality notification images 176 at the same time, so all events included in the first event group and the second event group are displayed. Even if all the events included in the above occur at the same time, it is possible to display the abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to each of these events at the same time. On the other hand, if not only all the events included in the first event group and all the events included in the second event group but also the events included in the third event group occur simultaneously, the event will be included in the third event group. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event that occurs is not displayed. In this case, even if the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is displayed first, all the events included in the first event group and all the events included in the second event group are displayed after that. If these events occur at the same time, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group that had been executed until then is interrupted, and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event with the higher priority is displayed. Display of image 176 begins. This makes it possible to prioritize the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event with higher priority.

Further, if there is a situation where the events included in the third event group continue, at least one of the higher priority events is resolved and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to that event is terminated. , the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the third event group is started. As a result, if there is enough space to display the abnormality notification image 176, it is possible to display the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event occurring at that time.

Note that if the predetermined event occurs again in a situation where the state in which the predetermined event has occurred has not been resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is displayed, the abnormality notification that has already been performed The display of the image 176 is simply continued, and multiple abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. Further, when the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the display range 171 during non-operation, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed so as to overwrite a part of the image for presentation.

Next, a case will be described in which an effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed. When the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43, 44 is executed, each of the sub-display devices 43, 44 moves between the initial position and the first juxtaposition position (see FIG. 53(b)), the first juxtaposition position. The area that will be the installation position (see FIG. 53(c)), the area between the first juxtaposition position and the second juxtaposition position, the area that will be the second juxtaposition position (see FIG. 53(d)), the second juxtaposition position (see FIG. 53(d)), It is arranged in the area between the juxtaposed position and the separation position and in the area that becomes the separation position (see FIG. 53(e)). In this case, if the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in an area of the main display device 41 that can face the sub display devices 43 and 44, there is a risk that the abnormality notification image 176 will be hidden by the sub display devices 43 and 44. On the other hand, if the area in which the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41 is to be finely switched according to the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the processing configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 becomes complicated. Put it away. Therefore, during the performance period for displacing the sub-display devices 43, 44, the plurality of display ranges 172 to 174 of the main display device 41 that do not always face the sub-display devices 43, 44 become the display range of the abnormality notification image 176. Specifically, a first display range 172 during operation is set at the upper left corner of the main display device 41, and a second display range during operation is set at the upper right corner of the main display device 41. 173, and a third display range 174 during operation, which is set at the lower right corner of the main display device 41.

During operation, each of the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 is set to a size that allows only one abnormality notification image 176 displayed at a predetermined size to be displayed. That is, during the period in which the effect of displacing the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is executed, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed simultaneously is three. On the other hand, as already explained, there are eight or more events for which abnormality notification is to be executed. Therefore, even in this case, the event to be displayed on the abnormality notification image 176 is selected according to the priority described above, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed for the selected event. For example, if four or more events that are subject to abnormality notification have occurred, the three events with the highest priority will be selected, and the abnormality notification corresponding to the three selected events will be sent. Image 176 is displayed. If any of the events for which the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed is resolved and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 for that event is terminated, the abnormality notification image 176 is no longer displayed. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event with the lower priority starts to be displayed.

Here, as already explained, the number of events included in the first event group is three. This number is less than or equal to the number of the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation, that is, the number of abnormality notification images 176 that can be displayed during the period in which the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43 and 44 is executed. There is. Thereby, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event included in the first event group having the highest priority can be displayed immediately regardless of when the event occurs.

Note that if the predetermined event occurs again in a situation where the state in which the predetermined event has occurred has not been resolved and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the predetermined event is displayed, the abnormality notification that has already been performed The display of the image 176 is simply continued, and multiple abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to the same event are not displayed. Furthermore, images for presentation are displayed in areas other than the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation of the main display device 41.

FIGS. 54(a) to 54(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display mode of the abnormality notification image 176 during the period in which the effect of displacing the sub display devices 43, 44 is executed. If the first abnormality, which is one of the above events, occurs in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are arranged in the first juxtaposition position as shown in FIG. 54(a), ), an abnormality notification image 176 indicating that a first abnormality has occurred is displayed in the first display range 172 of the main display device 41 during operation. Furthermore, on the first sub-display device 43 as well, a character image "abnormality has occurred" is displayed as a common notification image 175 indicating that an abnormality has occurred. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to understand that some kind of event has occurred, and also to confirm that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub display device 43. By checking 172, it is possible to understand the type of event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed. Note that the common notification image 175 is displayed so as to overwrite a part of the presentation image on the sub display devices 43 and 44.

Further, the types and positions of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 on which the common notification image 175 is displayed differ depending on the displacement state of each sub-display device 43 and 44. Specifically, the area where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are located between the initial position and the first juxtaposed position (see FIG. 53(b)), and the area where the sub display devices 43 and 44 are in the first juxtaposed position (see FIG. 53(c)) , or if it is arranged in a region between the first and second juxtaposed positions, the end of the first sub-display device 43 opposite to the boundary side with the second sub-display device 44 A common notification image 175 is displayed at a position closer to the department. In addition, the sub-display devices 43 and 44 may be located in the second juxtaposition position (see FIG. 53(d)), the area between the second juxtaposition position and the separation position, or the separation position (see FIG. 53(d)). 53(e)), the common notification image 175 is displayed at a position near the upper end of the second sub-display device 44.

After that, if a second abnormality occurs that is one of the above events and is different from the first abnormality in a situation where the first abnormality has not been resolved, the main display will be displayed as shown in FIG. 54(c). An abnormality notification image 176 indicating that a second abnormality has occurred in the second display range 173 during operation of the device 41 is displayed. Furthermore, even in this situation, the common notification image 175 indicating "abnormality occurrence" continues to be displayed on the first sub-display device 43. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to understand that some kind of event has occurred, and also to confirm that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub display device 43. 172 and the second display range 173 during operation, it is possible to grasp the type of event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed.

After that, in a situation where both the first abnormality and the second abnormality have not been resolved, if a third abnormality occurs that is one of the above events and is a different event from the first abnormality and the second abnormality, 54(d), an abnormality notification image 176 indicating that a third abnormality has occurred is displayed in the third display range 174 during operation of the main display device 41. Furthermore, even in this situation, the common notification image 175 indicating "abnormality occurrence" continues to be displayed on the first sub-display device 43. In this case, for example, by confirming that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub-display device 43, it is possible to understand that some kind of event has occurred, and also to confirm that the common notification image 175 is displayed on the first sub display device 43. 172, by checking the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation, it is possible to grasp the type of event for which abnormality notification is to be executed.

In the situation shown in FIG. 54(d), for example, when the first abnormal event is resolved, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the first abnormality in the first display range 172 during operation is ended. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the second abnormality in the second display range 173 during operation is displayed, and the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the third abnormality in the third display range 174 during operation is displayed. The display continues. In this way, even if the display of the abnormality notification image 176 ends in the first display range 172 during an operation in which the display start order of the abnormality notification image 176 is on the earlier side, an abnormality is displayed on the first display range 172 side during the operation. Instead of shifting the display target area of the notification image 176, the display of the abnormality notification image 176 is continued in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation, which are already the display targets. This makes it easier to confirm whether or not a predetermined event continues.

Further, in this way, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the second display range 173 during operation and the third display range 174 during operation, and the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. If a new event occurs in a situation where the system is not operating, an abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the newly occurring event is displayed in the first display range 172 during operation. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176 that continues to be displayed continues to be displayed in the display ranges 172 to 174 that have been displayed up to that point. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily perform the work of confirming whether or not a predetermined event continues.

Furthermore, in the situation shown in FIG. 54(d), if an event different from the first abnormal event, the second abnormal event, and the third abnormal event occurs, the priority of the newly occurring event is If the priority is higher than the priority of any of the third abnormal events, the display range 172 - where the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the event with the lowest priority among the first to third abnormal events is displayed At 174, the abnormality notification image 176 that has already been displayed is erased, and the display of the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the newly occurring event is started. Even in this case, the abnormality notification image 176 that continues to be displayed continues to be displayed in the display ranges 172 to 174 that have been displayed up to that point. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily perform the work of confirming whether or not a predetermined event continues.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for making it possible to display the abnormality notification image 176 as described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing processing corresponding to the notification command executed by the performance CPU 82. Note that the notification command handling process is executed in the command handling process of step S503 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 14).

In the processing for responding to notification commands, if a notification start command is received from the distribution side MPU 73 (step S1901: YES), notification type data corresponding to the notification start command is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82 (step S1902). ). The main MPU 62 executes management processing for determining whether an event that is a target for abnormality notification has occurred. When an event for which abnormality notification is to be executed occurs, the main MPU 62 transmits an abnormality occurrence command including information on the type of the event to the distribution MPU 73. When the distribution side MPU 73 receives the abnormality occurrence command, it transmits a notification start command including information on the type of event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality occurrence command to the production CPU 82. By receiving this notification start command, the performance CPU 82 stores the notification type data in the register of the performance CPU 82 as described above. Note that if a plurality of events occur simultaneously in the same period, notification type data corresponding to each of the plurality of events will be stored in the register of the performance CPU 82. In addition, if a notification start command corresponding to the same type of event as the event corresponding to the notification type data already stored in the register of the production CPU 82 is received, a new notification type data corresponding to the event is received. Memories are not performed.

If even one notification type data is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82, abnormality notification processing is executed in the light emission control task processing (step S504) in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 14). As a result, if even one notification type data is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82, the display light emitting section 53 continues to emit light for abnormality notification. Furthermore, if even one piece of notification type data is stored in the register of the production CPU 82, abnormality notification processing is executed in the sound output control task processing (step S505) in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 14). Ru. As a result, if even one type of notification data is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82, the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker section 54 is continued. Further, when the notification type data is stored in the register of the performance CPU 82, a process for displaying the abnormality notification image 176 on the display devices 41, 43, and 44 is executed. The details of this process will be explained later.

In the notification command response process, if a notification cancellation command is received from the distribution side MPU 73 (step S1903: YES), notification type data corresponding to the notification cancellation command is deleted from the register of the production CPU 82 (step S1904). ). The main MPU 62 executes management processing to determine whether the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is being executed has been resolved. When the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed is resolved, the main MPU 62 transmits an abnormality resolution command including information on the type of the event to the distribution MPU 73. When the distribution side MPU 73 receives the abnormality resolution command, it transmits a notification cancellation command including information on the type of event that triggered the transmission of the abnormality resolution command to the performance CPU 82. By receiving this notification cancellation command, the performance CPU 82 erases the notification type data corresponding to the notification cancellation command from the register of the performance CPU 82 as described above. As a result, all abnormal notifications corresponding to the deleted notification type data are terminated.

In addition, the method of specifying whether or not the state in which the event that is the target of abnormality notification has occurred in the main MPU 62 has been resolved is to use the detection result of the detection sensor to identify whether or not the event has occurred. If the detection result by the detection sensor corresponds to the fact that the event has not occurred, the state in which the event for which the abnormality notification is being executed is resolved. It may also be a method to identify that the event for which the abnormality notification is being executed occurs when a release operation that is set in response to the event for which the abnormality notification is being executed is performed. It may also be a method of specifying that the condition has been resolved, and if the latter condition is satisfied after the former condition is satisfied, then the event for which the abnormality notification is to be executed has occurred. This may also be a method of specifying that the problem has been resolved.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56, the notification setting process executed by the performance CPU 82 will be described. Note that the notification setting process is executed in the presentation calculation process of step S604 in the display control task process (FIG. 15).

If it is not the execution period of the effect that displaces the sub-display devices 43, 44 (step S2001: NO), on the condition that the notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S2002: YES), step S2003 Proceed to. In step S2003, it is determined whether the number of notification type data stored in the register of the performance CPU 82 is eight or more.

If the number of notification type data is less than 8 (step S2003: NO), the following procedure is performed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of all notification type data becomes the target of setting of the current drawing list. Setting processing is executed (step S2004). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the performance CPU 82 is set as a drawing target in the current drawing list to be output to the performance LSI 85.

By receiving the drawing list, the production LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86, and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data to display the current status. An abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to each of all occurring notification target events is displayed in the display range 171 during non-operation. In this case, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171 in accordance with the order in which the events occur, regardless of the priority set for the events to be notified.

If the number of notification type data is eight or more (step S2003: YES), seven pieces of notification type data are extracted as notification targets in order of priority as described above (step S2005). Then, a setting process is executed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the seven selected notification type data become the setting target of the current drawing list (step S2006). As a result, individual notification image data corresponding to each of the seven notification type data extracted in step S2005 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list to be outputted to the production LSI 85 this time.

By receiving the drawing list, the production LSI 85 pre-transfers all of the individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86, and uses the pre-transferred individual notification image data to perform the steps. The abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to each of the seven notification target events extracted in S2005 are displayed in the display range 171 during non-operation. In this case, the abnormality notification image 176 is displayed in the non-operating display range 171 in accordance with the order in which the events occur, regardless of the priority set for the events to be notified.

If it is the execution period of the effect that displaces the sub-display devices 43 and 44 (step S2001: YES), on the condition that the notification type data is stored in the register of the effect CPU 82 (step S2007: YES), step S2008 Proceed to. In step S2008, settings are made so that the common notification image data for displaying the common notification image 175 on either the first sub-display device 43 or the second sub-display device 44 is to be set in the current drawing list. Execute processing. In this case, as described above, the information in the drawing list is set so that the types and positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44 to which the common notification image 175 is displayed differ depending on the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44.

After that, if the number of notification type data stored in the register of the production CPU 82 is less than 4 (step S2009: NO), the individual notification image data corresponding to each of all notification type data is A setting process is executed to make the drawing list a setting target (step S2010). As a result, the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the notification type data stored in the register of the performance CPU 82 is set as a drawing target in the current drawing list to be output to the performance LSI 85.

By receiving the drawing list, the rendering LSI 85 transfers all of the common notification image data and individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 in advance. Then, using the pre-transferred common notification image data, the common notification image 175 is displayed at a position corresponding to the current displacement state on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state. do. In addition, by using the individual notification image data transferred in advance, the abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to all the events to be notified that are currently occurring are displayed in the first to third display ranges 172 to 174 during operation. so that it is displayed in In this case, even if the types of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed decrease or increase, the display ranges 172 to 174 to be displayed by the abnormality notification images 176, which will continue to be displayed from the previous timing, will change. Not done.

If the number of notification type data stored in the register of the performance CPU 82 is four or more (step S2009: YES), the three notification type data are targeted for notification in order from the side with the highest priority as described above. (Step S2011). Then, a setting process is executed so that the individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three selected notification type data become the setting target of the current drawing list (step S2012). As a result, individual notification image data corresponding to each of the three notification type data extracted in step S2011 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list to be outputted to the production LSI 85 this time.

By receiving the drawing list, the rendering LSI 85 transfers all of the common notification image data and individual notification image data set in the drawing list to the VRAM 86 in advance. Then, using the pre-transferred common notification image data, the common notification image 175 is displayed at a position corresponding to the current displacement state on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 corresponding to the current displacement state. do. Further, using the individual notification image data transferred in advance, the abnormality notification images 176 corresponding to each of the three notification target events extracted in step S2011 are displayed in the first to third display ranges during operation. 172 to 174. In this case, even if the types of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed decrease or increase, the display ranges 172 to 174 to be displayed by the abnormality notification images 176, which will continue to be displayed from the previous timing, will change. Not done.

<Effects of the configuration for displaying the abnormality notification image 176>
Even in a situation where the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are placed at a predetermined facing position (a position other than the initial position) where the range facing the display surface of the main display device 41 is widened, when a notification target event occurs, An abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the main display device 41. As a result, even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are not arranged at the predetermined opposing positions due to some kind of failure, the abnormality notification image 176 will be displayed on the main display device 41, and the abnormality notification image 176 will be displayed by the player or the user. It becomes possible to have the administrator of the game hall recognize it.

The abnormality notification image 176 is displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41 in an area that does not face the sub display devices 43 and 44 throughout the execution period of the displacement effect. This ensures the visibility of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41 without performing control such as changing the display position of the abnormality notification image 176 according to the positions of the sub display devices 43 and 44. becomes possible.

In a configuration in which the area for displaying the abnormality notification images 176 on the display surface of the main display device 41 is limited during the execution period of the displacement effect, the number of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed during the execution period of the displacement effect is a predetermined number. limited to. This makes it possible to ensure that the size of the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the display surface of the main display device 41 is increased to a certain extent.

Priorities are set for multiple types of notification target events to be displayed in the abnormality notification image 176, and if a number of notification target events exceeding the above-mentioned predetermined number occur during the execution period of the displacement effect, the priority is set to be high. The abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event on the side is displayed with priority. As a result, even if the number of abnormality notification images 176 to be displayed on the main display device 41 is limited to a predetermined number during the execution period of the displacement effect, the event corresponding to the notification target event with a higher priority can be handled. It becomes possible to display the abnormality notification image 176.

When a notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect, a common notification image 175 is displayed on the sub display devices 43 and 44. This makes it possible to emphasize that the notification target event has occurred.

The common notification image 175 is a common image that does not correspond to the type of notification target event. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the common notification image 175 on the sub display devices 43 and 44.

Only one common notification image 175 is displayed on sub display devices 43 and 44 even if the number of times a notification target event occurs is plural. This makes it possible to secure a wide area on the sub-display devices 43 and 44 in which images other than the common notification image 175 are displayed.

<Configuration for displaying images using special moving image data 185>
Next, a configuration for displaying images using the special moving image data 185 will be described.

As described above, moving image data exists as image data. As this moving image data, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. A moving image data group 182 and an attached image data group 183 including multiple types of attached image data are stored in advance.

FIG. 58(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the normal moving image data 184. In the normal moving image data 184, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data for each frame. Note that a frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to reference data, multiple frames of P picture data corresponding to first difference data, and multiple frames of B picture data corresponding to second difference data. It has .

I-picture data is data that can create one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. P-picture data is data that can create one frame of still image data by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before when decoding. . When decoding B-picture data, bidirectional prediction is performed by referring to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before and I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames later. , is data with which one frame of still image data can be created.

In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 184, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Further, B picture data is set as data for the second frame, . . . , m-1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m+1th frame, . . . , the n−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above-mentioned arrangement pattern and may be arbitrary.

By performing decoding processing on the normal moving image data 184, decoded image data 184a to 184d (hereinafter referred to as normal decoded image data 184a to 184d) for a plurality of update timings are stored in the register 93 from the normal moving image data 184. It will be created in the video development area 119 (see FIG. 16). These normal decoded image data 184a to 184d are image data in which some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d have different contents.

FIG. 58(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 185. In the special moving image data 185, file data is set at the first address, followed by a plurality of I picture data corresponding to reference data, but no compressed data other than these I picture data is set. By performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 185, decoded image data 185a to 185d (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 185a to 185d) for a plurality of update timings are stored in the register 93 from the special moving image data 185. It will be created in the video development area 119 (see FIG. 16). These special decoded image data 185a to 185d are image data in which the contents of at least some of the images displayed by these special decoded image data 185a to 185d are different from each other.

The amount of special moving image data 185 is set so that the minimum number of units of decoded image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, regarding the minimum unit number of decoded image data, the special moving image data 185 has 48 pieces of I picture data set, and the special moving image data 185 has 48 pieces of special decoded image data 185a to 185d. can be played. Note that some of the normal moving image data 184 has a data amount set so that the minimum number of units of normal decoded image data 184a to 184d that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced; In some cases, the amount of data is set so that it is possible to create a larger number of normal decoded image data 184a to 184d than the minimum number of units that can be set as image data.

Special decoded image data 185a to 185d are used as texture data. The memory module 83 stores in advance predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 185a to 185d as texture data. The special decoded image data 185a to 185d are all applied to the same predetermined object data, and the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are applied to the predetermined object data in the order of serial numbers. The types of 185a to 185d are sequentially changed. In other words, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d continuously change the display content of the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data over a plurality of update timings by sequentially changing the texture data applied to the predetermined object data. It is used as serial number texture data for changing. For example, if the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is a character image representing something other than a person, cat, fish, dog, or animal, the type of special decoded image data 185a to 185d to be applied to the predetermined object data is By sequentially changing the special decoded image data 185a to 185d in accordance with the serial number order, the pattern and color of the character image change continuously over a plurality of update timings. For example, when the individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data is a background image, the types of special decoded image data 185a to 185d to be applied to the predetermined object data are determined in the order of serial numbers of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d. By sequentially changing the pattern of the background image, the color of the background image, the type of individual images included in the background image, and the display position of the individual images included in the background image, etc., the pattern of the background image, the color of the background image, the display position of the individual images included in the background image, etc. This will change to

By setting the special moving image data 185 as described above, it becomes possible to store serial number texture data in the memory module 83 as one piece of moving image data. As described above, the moving image data is pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, but the decoded image data created by executing the decoding process by the moving image decoder 95 is stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93. written. The decoded image data will be stored and held in the video development area 119 until all of its use is completed. In such a configuration, by preparing serial number texture data as special moving image data 185, when using the serial number texture data, special moving image data 185 is temporarily stored and held in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86. However, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d, which function as sequential texture data, are stored and held in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93 instead of in the pre-transfer area 86a. This makes it possible to use the moving image development area 119 as a readout area for special decoded image data 185a to 185d that are used as sequential textures.

Furthermore, all of the compressed data included in the special moving image data 185 is I picture data, and does not include P picture data or B picture data. In other words, the same number of I picture data as the number of special decoded image data 185a to 185d after decoding is set, and one piece of special decoded image data 185a to 185d is created from one I picture data. . As a result, even if the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by decoding the special moving image data 185 is configured to be used as texture data, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are used for display. This makes it possible to prevent the image quality of the image from being lowered than when normal texture data is used.

The attached image data stored in the attached image data group 183 is each of a plurality of normal moving image data 184 included in the normal moving image data group 181 and a plurality of special moving image data 185 included in the special moving image data group 182. are provided in one-to-one correspondence. The attached image data displays images corresponding to the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d by the moving image data 184 and 185 during the period when the corresponding moving image data 184 and 185 are being decoded. This is still image data used for Specifically, the attached image data is set so that the image content has continuity with respect to the decoded image data in the first usage order among the plurality of corresponding decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d. . For example, the attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data 185 is texture data applied to predetermined object data corresponding to the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created from the special moving image data 185.

The manner in which decoding processing of moving image data 184 and 185 is executed using the period during which images using attached image data are displayed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 59. FIG. 59(a) shows a period in which an image is displayed using attached image data, FIG. 59(b) shows a decoding period of moving image data 184, 185, and FIG. 59(c) shows a period in which an image is displayed using attached image data. 184d and 185a to 185d are used to indicate the period during which image display is performed.

At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 59(b), it is the timing to start the decoding process of one moving image data 184, 185, so that one moving image is decoded as shown in FIG. 59(a). An image display period using the attached image data corresponding to data 184 and 185 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, which is an intermediate timing in the display period of the image using the attached image data, the decoding process of the one moving image data 184, 185 is completed as shown in FIG. 59(b). As a result, the moving image development area 119 in the register 93 stores decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the one piece of moving image data 184 and 185. Thereafter, at timing t3, the display of the image using the attached image data is completed as shown in FIG. 59(a), and as shown in FIG. 59(c), the decoded image data 184a to An image display period using 184d, 185a to 185d starts. This display period ends at timing t4 when the display of the image using the last decoded image data among the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by the above decoding process ends.

As described above, attached image data is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the moving image data 184, 185, and decoding processing of the moving image data 184, 185 is performed using the display period of the image using the attached image data. is executed. As a result, the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed in a situation where an image corresponding to an image that is subsequently displayed using the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d is displayed. . Therefore, it is possible to perform the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 without causing a waiting time for image display while ensuring the continuity of image display.

A processing configuration for displaying images using the moving image data 184 and 185 will be described below. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a process for setting the use of moving image data executed by the performance CPU 82. The use setting process for moving image data is executed in the background arithmetic process in step S603 or the effect arithmetic process in step S604 in the task process (FIG. 15).

If it is not the period of use of the moving image data 184, 185 (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to start decoding processing of one piece of moving image data 184, 185 (step S2102). If it is the timing to start the decoding process (step S2102: YES), one piece of moving image data 184, 185 to be subjected to the current decoding process is grasped (step S2103), and the moving image data 184, 185 is The corresponding attached image data is grasped (step S2104). Then, decoding designation information indicating that decoding processing should be executed is set in the current drawing list (step S2105).

By executing the processing in steps S2103 to S2105, one piece of moving image data 184, 185 and its corresponding attached image data are set in the current drawing list as image data to be used. When the moving image data 184 and 185 are set in the drawing list, as already explained, the moving image data 184 and 185 are pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, and the pre-transferred moving image data 184 , 185 are subjected to decoding processing by the video decoder 95. However, in the drawing process corresponding to the current drawing list, the moving image data 184, 185 and the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d created from the moving image data 184, 185 are not subject to the drawing process. Instead, the attached image data is subjected to drawing processing.

If a negative determination is made in step S2102 or if the process in step S2105 is executed, various image data other than the moving image data 184, 185 and attached image data are grasped as objects to be set in the current drawing list (step S2106 ). Then, the parameter information applied to the various image data set in the current drawing list is updated and grasped as the object to be set in the drawing list (step S2107).

Here, as already explained, if the moving image data 184, 185 are set in the drawing list, the pre-transfer control unit 94 of the LSI for effect 85 makes an affirmative determination in step S1013 in the pre-transfer process (FIG. 29), An instruction to decode the moving image data 184, 185 is given to the moving image decoder 95 of the presentation LSI 85 (step S1014). When issuing this decoding instruction, the video decoder 95 can specify the area in the data storage area 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 where the moving image data 184, 185 that is the target of the current decoding instruction is stored. The video decoder 95 can specify an area in which to store the information and the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d obtained by decoding the video data 184, 185 in the video development area 119 in the register 93. The video decoder 95 is provided with information for

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the decoding process executed by the video decoder 95. In the decoding process, based on the information provided by the advance transfer control unit 94, the address of the area in the data storage area 123 where the moving image data 184, 185 that is the target of the current decoding instruction is stored is determined ( Step S2201). Also, based on the information provided by the advance transfer control unit 94, decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d obtained by decoding the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93. The address of the area to be displayed is grasped (step S2202). Thereafter, the moving image data 184 and 185 are read out from the data storage area 123 corresponding to the address grasped in step S2201, and the moving image data 184 and 185 are decoded. Then, each of the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d resulting from the decoding is written into each area of the address grasped in step S2202 (step S2203). As a result, the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created from the moving image data 184 and 185 are developed in the moving image development area 119 in the register 93. In this case, the decoded image data in the first order among the created decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d is stored in the area of the start address in the moving image development area 119. Then, the subsequent decoded image data is sequentially stored in areas continuous to the area of the start address.

Returning to the explanation of the video data usage setting process (FIG. 60), if the usage period of the video data 184, 185 is reached (step S2101: YES), decoding corresponding to the value of the frame counter provided in the work memory 84 is performed. The image data is grasped as the object to be set in the current drawing list (step S2108). The frame counter determines the number of decoded image data to be used this time among the plurality of decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d created by performing decoding processing on one moving image data 184 and 185. This counter is used by the production CPU 82 to specify whether or not to use the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d. Each time the data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are set as objects to be used in the drawing list, 1 is added. When decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d corresponding to the value of the frame counter are set as objects to be used in the drawing list, the area corresponding to the value of the frame counter in the development area 119 for moving images in the register 93 of the LSI for production 85 Set the address as address information. As a result, the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 of the production LSI 85 can specify the area where the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d to be used are stored, and the specified area The decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are read out and drawn.

Thereafter, various types of image data other than the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d are recognized as objects to be set in the current drawing list (step S2109). Furthermore, the parameter information applied to the various image data set in the current drawing list is updated and grasped as the object to be set in the drawing list (step S2110). Then, use instruction information for the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d indicating that the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d should be used is set in the current drawing list (step S2111).

As already explained, the pre-transfer control unit 94 pre-transfers the image data set in the drawing list received from the performance CPU 82 to the pre-transfer area 86a, but the decoded image data 184a to 184d are included in the drawing list as targets for use. , 185a to 185d are set, the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d are already stored in the moving image expansion area 119 in the register 93 at that point, and are therefore transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a. No advance forwarding is performed. Specifically, in the preliminary transfer process (FIG. 29), it is determined in step S1003 whether the data to be transferred this time is decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d, and the data to be transferred this time is decoded image data. 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the process for performing advance transfer shown in steps S1004 to S1012 is not executed.

As already explained, the pre-transfer control unit 94 performs a process of rewriting the address information set in the drawing list received from the presentation CPU 82 (FIG. 30) for the image data that has been pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a. However, as described above, the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d are not subject to advance transfer to the advance transfer area 86a, so the address information rewriting process is performed for the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d. (Figure 30) is not executed. Specifically, in the preliminary transfer process (FIG. 29), it is determined in step S1003 whether the data to be transferred this time is decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d, and the data to be transferred this time is decoded image data. 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d (step S1003: YES), the address information rewriting process shown in step S1015 is not executed. As mentioned above, for the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, the address of the area stored in the video development area 119 in the register 93 is used as address information in the drawing list sent from the production CPU 82. It is set.

<Effects of configuration for displaying images using special moving image data 185>
Since special video data 185 is provided that includes I picture data but does not include B picture data and P picture data, which are difference data, the special video data 185 is created by performing decoding processing on the special video data 185. It is possible to make the special decoded image data 185a to 185d higher in image quality than the normal decoded image data 184a to 184d created by performing decoding processing on the normal moving image data 184. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to treat image data having the same image quality as normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data without using an area for reading the normal still image data.

The special moving image data 185 includes a plurality of I picture data. Thereby, by performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 185, it is possible to create a plurality of image data having image quality comparable to that of normal still image data.

A plurality of special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 185 are used according to the order of use determined in the special moving image data 185. As a result, when using a plurality of special decoded image data 185a to 185d, there is no need to set the order of use of the special video data 185 separately from the special moving image data 185. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the special decoded image data 185a to 185d are stored in advance in the memory module 83 as normal still image data, it is possible to reduce the processing load for setting the order of use of image data.

During the period in which the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 are performing drawing processing, the special moving image data 185 is decoded by a video decoder 95 provided separately from the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97. executed. This makes it possible to avoid increasing the processing load on the 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97, and to prevent the period during which the decoding process is being executed from becoming an image display waiting period.

Attached image data is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the moving image data 184, 185, and decoding processing of the moving image data 184, 185 is executed using the display period of the image using the attached image data. Ru. As a result, the decoding process of the moving image data 184 and 185 is executed in a situation where an image corresponding to an image that is subsequently displayed using the decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d is displayed. . Therefore, it is possible to perform the decoding process on the moving image data 184 and 185 without causing a waiting time for image display while ensuring the continuity of image display.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the sub display devices 43 and 44 do not display 3D images, but only 2D images, but in this embodiment, the sub display devices 43 and 44 Both 2D images and 3D images can be displayed at 43 and 44. The different configurations will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sub-display drawing area 191 in this embodiment. The sub-display drawing area 191 is provided with a sub-first frame area 117 and a sub-second frame area 118, similar to the sub-display drawing area 116 in the first embodiment. In addition to these frame areas 117 and 118, the sub-display drawing area 191 also includes a first sub-2D drawing area 192 in which drawing data for displaying a 2D image on the first sub-display device 43 is created. , a first sub 3D drawing area 193 where drawing data for displaying a 3D image on the first sub display device 43 is created, and a drawing data for displaying a 2D image on the second sub display device 44. A 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub to be created and a 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub to create the drawing data for displaying a 3D image on the second sub display device 44 are provided. .

The first frame area for sub 117 and the second frame area for sub 118 each include drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub and drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub. By combining the data, one frame of drawing data to be displayed on the first sub display device 43 is created, and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub and the drawing data for the second sub By combining the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195, one frame worth of drawing data to be displayed on the second sub-display device 44 is created. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, the drawing data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 is distributed and set in odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame regions 117, 118. The drawing data corresponding to the second sub-display device 44 is distributed and set on even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction.

The processing configuration for creating drawing data in the frame areas 117 and 118 will be described below. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the sub-display drawing data synthesis process executed by the 3D control unit 97. Note that the sub-display drawing data synthesis process is executed as a part of the drawing data synthesis process in step S814 in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20).

When creating drawing data corresponding to the first sub display device 43 (step S2301: YES), first, the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set as an output source area (step S2302). Thereafter, a setting process for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2303). When the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the drawing count counter uses vertical lines as one unit for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 is used to specify how many vertical lines are present in the horizontal direction. In step S2303, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the first sub 3D drawing area 193 is set in the drawing number counter.

Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is extracted in the first sub 3D drawing area 193 (step S2304). Also, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 that are the drawing targets, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is The vertical line data extracted in step S2304 is drawn for the vertical line (step S2305).

Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2306). Then, it is determined whether the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2307). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2304 and S2305 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing in steps S2304 and S2305, the drawing of the drawing data created in the first sub 3D drawing area 193 onto the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

Thereafter, the first sub 2D drawing area 192 is set as the output source area (step S2308). Then, the process of setting the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2309). When the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub is set as the output source area, the drawing count counter uses vertical lines as one unit for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 is used to specify how many vertical lines are present in the horizontal direction. In step S2309, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the first sub 2D drawing area 192 is set in the drawing number counter.

Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is extracted in the first sub 2D drawing area 192 (step S2310). Also, among the odd-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 that are the drawing targets, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing number counter is specified, and the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is The vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is drawn for the vertical line (step S2311).

Here, a part of the drawing data that has already been created in the first sub 3D drawing area 193 is drawn on the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118. Therefore, in step S2311, one of color information overwriting processing, color information blending processing, and color information non-setting is performed depending on the α data that is attached and set for the vertical line data extracted in step S2310. Execute. Specifically, if the α data corresponds to opacity, the data of the vertical line extracted in step S2310 is directly overwritten on the vertical line to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118. If the α data corresponds to translucency, the data of the vertical line extracted in step S2310 and the data set for the vertical line to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 are made to correspond to the value of the α data. and blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2310 is not set. As a result, it is possible to create drawing data as a result of superimposing the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 193 for the first sub and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 192 for the first sub. It becomes possible.

Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2312). Then, it is determined whether the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2313). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2310 and S2311 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing in steps S2310 and S2311, the drawing of the drawing data created in the first sub 2D drawing area 192 onto the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

On the other hand, when creating drawing data corresponding to the second sub display device 44 (step S2301: NO), the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is first set as the output source area (step S2314). Thereafter, a setting process for the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2315). When the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is set as the output source area, the drawing count counter uses vertical lines as one unit for the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 is used to specify how many vertical lines are present in the horizontal direction. In step S2315, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the second sub 3D drawing area 195 is set in the drawing number counter.

Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is extracted in the second sub 3D drawing area 195 (step S2316). Also, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 that are the drawing targets, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is specified, and the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is The vertical line data extracted in step S2316 is drawn for the vertical line (step S2317).

Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2318). Then, it is determined whether the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2319). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2316 and S2317 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing in steps S2316 and S2317, the drawing of the drawing data created in the second sub 3D drawing area 195 onto the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

Thereafter, the second sub 2D drawing area 194 is set as the output source area (step S2320). Then, the process of setting the drawing number counter provided in the register 93 is executed (step S2321). When the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set as the output source area, the drawing count counter takes a vertical line as one unit for the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub. In this case, the 3D control unit 97 is used to specify how many vertical lines are present in the horizontal direction. In step S2321, a value corresponding to the number of vertical lines of the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub is set in the drawing number counter.

Thereafter, vertical line data corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is extracted in the second sub 2D drawing area 194 (step S2322). Also, among the even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal direction in the frame areas 117 and 118 that are the drawing targets, the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is specified, and the vertical line corresponding to the current value of the drawing count counter is The vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is drawn on the vertical line (step S2323).

Here, a part of the drawing data that has already been created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub is drawn on the vertical lines of the frame areas 117 and 118. Therefore, in step S2323, one of color information overwriting processing, color information blending processing, and color information non-setting is performed depending on the α data that is attached and set for the vertical line data extracted in step S2322. Execute. Specifically, if the α data corresponds to opacity, the data of the vertical line extracted in step S2322 is directly overwritten on the vertical line to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118. If the α data corresponds to translucency, the data of the vertical line extracted in step S2322 and the data set for the vertical line to be drawn in the frame areas 117 and 118 are made to correspond to the value of the α data. and blend. If the α data corresponds to complete transparency, the vertical line data extracted in step S2322 is not set. As a result, it is possible to create drawing data as a result of superimposing the drawing data created in the 3D drawing area 195 for the second sub and the drawing data created in the 2D drawing area 194 for the second sub. It becomes possible.

Thereafter, the value of the drawing number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2324). Then, it is determined whether the value of the drawing number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2325). If the value of the drawing number counter is not "0", the processes of steps S2322 and S2323 are executed for the vertical line data corresponding to the new value of the drawing number counter. Then, by repeating the processing in steps S2322 and S2323, the drawing of the drawing data created in the second sub 2D drawing area 194 onto the frame areas 117 and 118 is completed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the sub-display devices 43 and 44 have a configuration in which a 2D image and a 3D image can be displayed simultaneously, drawing for displaying an image on the first sub-display device 43 is possible. It becomes possible to simultaneously create both data and drawing data for displaying an image on the second sub-display device 44 in one frame area 117, 118.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of address information rewriting processing (FIG. 30 in the first embodiment) in the advance transfer control unit 94 is different from the first embodiment. The different configurations will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing address information rewriting processing in this embodiment. First, the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time was transferred is set as a new index area (step S2401). Note that in this embodiment, the pre-transfer area 86a having the data storage area 123 is not set in the VRAM 86. Therefore, the image data to be transferred is not transferred to the data storage area 123, but is image data that was set in the current or previous drawing list and has not yet been subjected to drawing processing. Transferred to an area different from the area where the data is stored.

Thereafter, the index table provided in the register 93 is rewritten (step S2402). The index table is a table in which a correspondence relationship between index information for specifying an index area and a group of addresses of the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time has been transferred is set. In the index table, correspondence relationships between index information and address groups of areas of the VRAM 86 are set for the number of image data that have been transferred to the VRAM 86 in advance. In the index table rewriting process, the index information for specifying the newly set index area in step S2401 is associated with the address group of the area of the VRAM 86 to which the image data to be transferred this time was transferred. Write to the index table in the same state.

After that, the index information for specifying the newly set index area is overwritten on the address information corresponding to the image data to be transferred this time in the drawing list (step S2403). When drawing the image data, the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 read index information corresponding to the image data from the address information of the drawing list, and provide the read index information to the transfer controller 92. The transfer controller 92 grasps the area of the VRAM 86 corresponding to the provided index information from the index table, and provides the image data read from the area of the VRAM 86 to the 2D control section 96 or the 3D control section 97.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, by changing the relationship between the type of index area and the area of the VRAM 86 as necessary, it is possible to flexibly specify the aggregation of areas of the VRAM 86 using the index area. becomes possible.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided from the presentation CPU 82 as a drawing list for displaying images at one update timing, the pre-transfer control unit of the presentation LSI 85 At 94, the drawing lists are integrated. The different configurations will be explained below. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the drawing list output process in this embodiment executed by the presentation CPU 82.

First, 2D image data aggregation processing is executed (step S2501). In the aggregation process, all image data to be set in the 2D drawing list in the current process is specified. Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S2502). If the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is less than the reference number (step S2502: NO), one 2D drawing list is created (step S2503). All of the 2D image data collected in step S2501 is set in this one 2D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 2D drawing list (step S2504). The 2D control unit 96 determines whether creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing process (FIG. 19), and specifies the data specified in one or two 2D drawing lists corresponding to one frame of image display. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all image data.

On the other hand, if the number of 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S2502: YES), two 2D drawing lists are created (step S2505). In this case, the 2D image data aggregated in step S2501 is distributed and set in two 2D drawing lists while ensuring continuity of writing order. In both of these two 2D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 2D drawing lists, the 2D control unit 96 sets the integration instruction information to the 2D drawing list that is to be subjected to drawing processing first (step S2506). Specifically, the integrated instruction information is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 2D drawing list. The integration instruction information instructs the advance transfer control section 94 of the production LSI 85 to integrate two consecutive drawing lists that are subject to preliminary transfer processing into one drawing list. This is information for Thereafter, the creation completion data is set in the 2D drawing list that will later be subjected to drawing processing in the 2D control unit 96 among these two 2D drawing lists (step S2507). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 2D drawing list.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S2504 or step S2507 is executed, 3D image data aggregation process is executed (step S2508). In the aggregation process, all image data to be set in the 3D drawing list in the current process is specified. Thereafter, it is determined whether the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is equal to or greater than a reference number (for example, 10) (step S2509). If the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is less than the reference number (step S2509: NO), one 3D drawing list is created (step S2510). All of the 3D image data collected in step S2508 is set in this one 3D drawing list. Then, creation completion data is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list (step S2511). The 3D control unit 97 determines whether creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing process (FIG. 20), and specifies the data specified in one or two 3D drawing lists corresponding to one frame of image display. It is determined that the drawing process has been completed for all image data.

On the other hand, if the number of 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is equal to or greater than the reference number (step S2509: YES), two 3D drawing lists are created (step S2512). In this case, the 3D image data aggregated in step S2508 is distributed and set in two 3D drawing lists while ensuring continuity of writing order. In both of these two 3D drawing lists, the number of image data is less than the reference number. Then, of these two 3D drawing lists, the 3D control unit 97 sets the integration instruction information to the 3D drawing list that is to be subjected to drawing processing first (step S2513). Specifically, the integrated instruction information is set along with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list. Thereafter, the creation completion data is set in the 3D drawing list that will later be the target of the drawing process in the 3D control unit 97 among these two 3D drawing lists (step S2514). Specifically, the creation completion data is set in association with the display order priority data for the image data in the last order in the 3D drawing list.

In the drawing list output process, when the process of step S2511 or step S2514 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2515). In other processing, steps S919 to S921 of the drawing list output processing (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are executed. Note that, before step S2501, the process of steps S901 to S906 of the drawing list output process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment may be executed.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing advance transfer processing in this embodiment executed by the advance transfer control unit 94.

First, other processing is executed (step S2601). In other processing, steps S1001 to S1015 of the advance transfer processing (FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, on the condition that preliminary transfer for one drawing list has been completed in the current processing round (step S2602: YES), it is determined whether or not integration instruction information is set in the current drawing list. (Step S2603). If the integration instruction information is set (step S2603: YES), the drawing list set in the following order for the drawing list for which preliminary transfer has been completed this time is stored in the pre-transfer storage area 121 of the register 93. It is read out as an execution target for transfer processing (step S2604). Thereafter, the integration flag provided in the register 93 is set to "1" (step S2605).

On the other hand, if the integration instruction information is not set in the current drawing list (step S2603: NO), the integration process is performed on the condition that the integration flag of the register 93 is set to "1" (step S2606: YES). is executed (step S2607). In the integration process, the drawing list in which the integration instruction information has been set and the drawing list for which preliminary transfer has been completed this time are integrated into one drawing list. In this case, the image data set in each drawing list is aggregated into one drawing list while ensuring the continuity of the writing order. Thereafter, the integration flag of the register 93 is cleared to "0" (step S2608).

If a negative determination is made in step S2606, or if the process in step S2608 is executed, advance transfer completion processing is executed (step S2609). In the preliminary transfer completion process, if the drawing list for which preliminary transfer has been completed this time is not the target of the integration process (step S2607), the drawing list is stored in the post-transfer storage area 122 of the register 93 as the current storage target. The data is stored in the storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the drawing list for which preliminary transfer has been completed this time is the target of the integration process (step S2607), one drawing list after the integration process is stored in the post-transfer storage area 122 of the register 93. It is stored in the target storage areas 122a to 122t (see FIG. 23).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists are provided from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, the presentation The advance transfer control unit 94 of the LSI 85 integrates the plurality of 2D drawing lists or the plurality of 3D drawing lists into one drawing list. This eliminates the need to refer to a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists when the 2D control unit 96 or 3D control unit 97 executes drawing processing according to the drawing list.

Further, the above-described integration of drawing lists is executed when the preliminary transfer control unit 94 completes the preliminary transfer process of image data for a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists. This makes it possible to use the opportunity to pre-transfer image data as an opportunity to integrate a plurality of 2D drawing lists or a plurality of 3D drawing lists.

Note that the number of drawing lists that are subject to execution of the integration process is not limited to two, and in order to display one frame of image, three or more 2D drawing lists or three or more 3D drawing lists may be used. If the list is supplied from the performance CPU 82, the number may be three. Furthermore, the 2D drawing list and the 3D drawing list provided by the performance CPU 82 in order to display one frame of images may be configured to be the execution targets of the integration process.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) If the image data that has already been read out to the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86 is set as a new read target in the drawing list provided by the performance CPU 82, the image data is the data in the pre-transfer area 86a. Instead of a configuration that is limited to copying between storage areas 123, the copying is not performed and the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 in which the image data is already stored is the address information of the drawing list. The configuration may be set to . In this case, although the image data to be read cannot be stored in the data storage area 123 where the image data is written on the rear side, there is no need to copy the image data between the data storage areas 123.

(2) A history area may be provided separately from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86, and the image data pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a may be stored in the history area according to the order in which they were pre-transferred. In this case, a storage area capable of storing a plurality of pieces of image data, such as 256 pieces or 512 pieces, is secured as a history area, for example. Then, in a predetermined order, these multiple storage areas become the storage targets for image data, and when image data is stored in the storage area in the last order, the storage area in the first order is used to store the image data. Configure it as a storage target. In this configuration, each time new image data is pre-transferred to the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is stored in the storage area that is the storage target in the history area. When the image data specified in the drawing list provided by the rendering CPU 82 is to be read into the pre-transfer area 86a, the image data is first stored in one of the history areas. Determine whether or not it is stored in the area. If the image data is stored in any storage area of the history area, the image data stored in that storage area is read out to the pre-transfer area 86a. On the other hand, if the image data is not stored in any storage area in the history area, the image data is read from the memory module 83 to the pre-transfer area 86a, and the read image data is stored in the history area as the current storage target. storage area. Even with this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of reading image data from the memory module 83. In addition, with this configuration, since a history area is provided separately from the pre-transfer area 86a, the pre-transfer area 86a contains only image data that is specified as a target for use in the drawing list provided to the LSI 85 for production. It becomes possible to read out the data. Note that the above-mentioned history area may be provided in a RAM different from the VRAM 86.

(3) Instead of the configuration in which only the address ID corresponding to the start address is set in the search table 125 among the address ID group set in the address information of the drawing list provided from the rendering CPU 82, the final address is A configuration may be adopted in which only the corresponding address ID is set in the search table 125, or a configuration in which only the address ID corresponding to the intermediate address is set in the search table 125. Alternatively, the address ID corresponding to the start address and the address ID corresponding to the final address may be set in the search table 125, or the entire address ID group may be set in the search table 125. . This makes it possible to more accurately identify the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123 of the pre-transfer area 86a.

(4) Instead of the configuration in which an address ID is set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data stored in the data storage area 123, for example, identification information is set in each piece of image data. In the case where the image data is identified, the identification information may be set in the search table 125 as information for specifying the type of image data. In this case, if the identification information has a smaller amount of information than one address ID, it is possible to reduce the amount of information for specifying the type of image data.

(5) A resident area is provided in the VRAM 86 in addition to the pre-transfer area 86a, and the image data for starting fluctuations and the image data for abnormality notification necessary to start the effect of the game repeat are stored in the operating power to the CPU 82 for effect. It may be read out to the resident area when the supply of operating power is started, and the read state may be maintained while the operating power is being supplied. In this case, even if the start condition for starting the replay effect at any timing or the start condition for starting the abnormality notification are satisfied, the image can be displayed using the image data read from the resident area. , compared to the case where image data is read from the memory module 83, it is possible to shorten the period required from when the above-mentioned start condition is satisfied until display of an image is started.

(6) A configuration that does not read the data from the ROM if the data to be read has already been read to the RAM, and a configuration that does not read the data from the ROM if the data to be read has already been read to the RAM. The structure of copying data between areas of RAM may be applied to data other than image data.

(7) When the preliminary transfer of the image data specified in the drawing list to the preliminary transfer area 86a is completed, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 of the transfer destination is overwritten with the address information of the drawing list. The configuration is not limited, and the identification information may be set as information separate from the address information in the drawing list. Even in this case, since information corresponding to the transfer destination area is not set in the drawing list provided by the performance CPU 82, it is possible to reduce the amount of information in the drawing list.

(8) The pre-transfer control unit 94 specifies whether the image data specified in the drawing list is stored in the data storage area 123 of the transfer destination in the pre-transfer area 86a, and It may also be configured such that when it is specified that the data storage area 123 has changed, identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 is set in the drawing list. Thereby, the fact that the identification information is set in the drawing list means that the reading of the image data is completed.

(9) Instead of the configuration in which the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d created by performing decoding processing on the moving image data 184 and 185 are stored in the register 93, the data is stored in the pre-transfer area 86a. It may also be configured to be stored in the area 123. In this configuration, if one piece of decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d is stored in one data storage area 123, the decoded image data 184a to 184d, 185a to 185d are stored in the data storage area. 123, the identification information corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be set in the address information of the drawing list. In addition, in a configuration in which identification information is set even for decoded image data 184a to 184d and 185a to 185d, image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list will be set in the immediately preceding display order. The image data corresponding to the priority data will be read out in an area whose address is continuous with the area where the image data is being read out. Therefore, it is possible to set only an offset value to address information corresponding to image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of address information after the preliminary transfer of image data is completed.

(10) When the preliminary transfer of image data is completed, image data whose display order priority data is "1" or later in the drawing list is not limited to the configuration in which an offset value is set as address information, and any image Even if the image data is data, the address information may be configured to include identification information that is information for specifying the address of the area from which the image data is being read.

(11) When the advance transfer of data specified in instruction information such as a drawing list is completed, information corresponding to the area to which the data is transferred is set in the instruction information. It may also be applied to a configuration that uses instruction information different from a list.

(12) Instead of the configuration in which a maximum of two 2D drawing lists are provided from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, three or four or more 2D drawing lists are provided. A configuration may also be provided in which a list may be provided. Also, instead of the configuration in which a maximum of two 3D drawing lists are provided from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, three or four or more 3D drawing lists may be provided. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which the following information can be provided.

(13) Instead of the configuration in which a plurality of drawing lists are always provided from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85 in order to display an image at one update timing, one drawing list is always provided to the rendering LSI 85 to display an image at one update timing. A configuration may be adopted in which only the drawing list can be provided from the rendering CPU 82 to the rendering LSI 85. For example, in a configuration that does not have the function of displaying 3D images, only one 2D drawing list will be provided. In this case, if the number of 2D image data to be used at one update timing is less than the standard number, only one drawing list is provided, and the 2D image data to be used at one update timing is the reference number. A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of drawing lists are provided as long as the number of drawing lists is greater than or equal to the number of drawing lists.

(14) The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which 2D image data and 3D image data are set in different drawing lists, and these 2D image data and 3D image data are set in the same drawing list. The configuration may be set to . In this case, it is possible to reduce the number of drawing lists provided by the performance CPU 82. However, in this configuration, it is necessary to clearly distinguish between 2D image data and 3D image data in the drawing list. Specifically, the configuration for this distinction is such that 2D image data is set to display order priority data within a predetermined numerical value range, and 3D image data is set to a specific numerical value range that does not overlap with the predetermined numerical value range. A configuration may be considered in which display order priority data is set. As a result, even if the configuration is such that 2D image data and 3D image data are aggregated and set in the same drawing list, the 2D image data and 3D image data can be combined in the drawing list. It becomes possible to clearly distinguish between the two.

In addition, in the configuration in which 2D image data and 3D image data are aggregated and set in the same drawing list as described above, one of the 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 sets the drawing list. After the drawing process using the drawing list is completed, the drawing process using the drawing list is executed on the other side, thereby eliminating the need to provide a plurality of the same drawing lists from the effect CPU 82 to the effect LSI 85.

(15) The image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 is not limited to the configuration in which the image data is aggregated and set in one drawing list, and some Image data corresponding to one display device may be set in a separate drawing list from image data corresponding to other display devices. For example, a drawing list in which only image data corresponding to the main display device 41 is set, and a drawing list in which image data corresponding to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 are set, are sent from the presentation CPU 82. Alternatively, the drawing list corresponding to each of the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 may be provided from the rendering CPU 82. In this case, since the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set are distinguished for each drawing list, the display devices 41, 43, and 44 to be set are identified in the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97. It becomes easier to do.

(16) The drawing list provided by the effecting CPU 82 may be divided into a plurality of drawing lists in the effecting LSI 85, and each divided drawing list may be used in the 2D control unit 96 or 3D control unit 97. good. For example, one drawing list in which 2D image data and 3D image data are aggregated for use is provided from the presentation CPU 82 to the presentation LSI 85, and the presentation LSI 85 transfers the image data in advance. A configuration may be adopted in which the single drawing list is divided into a drawing list in which 2D image data is set and a drawing list in which 3D image data is set, depending on timing or the like. As a result, while keeping the number of drawing lists provided from the performance CPU 82 small, drawing lists corresponding to each of the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97 are individually provided to the 2D control unit 96 and 3D control unit 97. It becomes possible to do so.

(17) A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of the same drawing list is provided from the performance CPU 82 to the performance LSI 85. In this case, for example, the drawing list is configured such that not only the address ID corresponding to the storage source area of the image data in the memory module 83 but also information corresponding to the storage destination area of the image data in the VRAM 86 is set. Of the plurality of identical drawing lists, one drawing list may be provided to the advance transfer control section 94 and one drawing list may be provided to the 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to execute the drawing process in the 2D control unit 96 and the 3D control unit 97 for the drawing list for which the preliminary transfer of all image data has not been completed in the advance transfer control unit 94.

(18) A read completion flag is provided corresponding to each data storage area 123 in the pre-transfer area 86a, and when the pre-transfer control unit 94 completes the transfer of image data to the data storage area 123 of the transfer destination. A configuration may also be adopted in which the read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123 is set to "1". In this case, the 2D control section 96 and the 3D control section 97 read out image data from the data storage area 123 on the condition that the readout completion flag is set to "1"; In this case, the read completion flag corresponding to the data storage area 123 may be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to prevent the process of reading image data from the data storage area 123 for which reading of image data has not yet been completed.

(19) The number of areas of the VRAM 86 collectively designated by the identification information of one of the index areas 127a to 127c may be different for each index area 127a to 127c. This makes it possible to specify an area of a size suitable for the type of data to be stored in each of the index areas 127a to 127c using a single piece of identification information.

(20) The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which multiple areas of the VRAM 86 are specified by one identification information in the index areas 127a to 127c, and a configuration in which one area of the VRAM 86 is specified by one identification information is also possible. good. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which there is an index area in which one area of the VRAM 86 is specified by one identification information, and an index area in which a plurality of areas in the VRAM 86 are specified by one identification information.

(21) One index area 127a to 127c may include an area of VRAM 86 where addresses are not consecutive, and an area where addresses are not consecutive is included as an area of VRAM 86 specified by one identification information. It may also be a configuration.

(22) The special moving image data 185 is not limited to a configuration in which multiple types of I picture data are set, and may be configured in which only one type of I picture data is set in the special moving image data 185. . In this case, only one type of special decoded image data is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 185. Even with this configuration, it is possible to read still image data such as texture data to an area different from the pre-transfer area 86a of the VRAM 86.

Further, in this configuration, a plurality of I picture data of the same type may be set in the special moving image data 185. In this case, by performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 185, a plurality of identical special decoded image data will be created. In this configuration, when the same special decoded image data is used at multiple update timings, the same special decoded image data can be used by simply using the special decoded image data according to the usage order corresponding to the special moving image data 185. It becomes possible to use it over multiple update timings. Furthermore, when multiple pieces of the same special decoded image data are created in this way, only one of them is used, and the remaining special decoded image data are not stored after the decoding process. It may also be configured such that it is deleted from the area where it is located.

(23) A configuration in which a separate storage area is provided in the VRAM 86 or the register 93, and special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 185 are separately stored in the separate storage area. You can also use it as In this case, even if the period of use of the special decoded image data 185a to 185d has once ended, the special decoded image data 185a to 185d can be read from a separate storage area for next use. There is no need to perform decoding processing again.

(24) Although the special moving image data 185 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, the difference data may be set so that the difference is "0". In this case, a plurality of pieces of the same special decoded image data will be created.

(25) The texture data stored in advance in the memory module 83 as still image data is read out from the memory module 83 when the supply of operating power to the production CPU 82 is started, and is stored in the VRAM 86 for texture data. It may also be configured to be written in an area. In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area increases. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to change the type of texture data read into the texture area every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the rendering LSI 85 will increase. On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as special moving image data 185, it is not necessary to replace the texture area, and some of the texture data can be expanded for moving images in the register 93 as needed. It becomes possible to read out to the area 119. Furthermore, when the video development area 119 is also used as an area for using texture data, the texture data itself is not read out to the video development area 119, but the special video data 185 is decoded. Since the special decoded image data 185a to 185d created by the execution are read out, the handling of the video development area 119 in the production LSI 85 is changed according to the type of data read out to the video development area 119. No need arises.

Further, in the above configuration, not only the texture data but also the object data may be read out from the memory module 83 to the object area of the VRAM 86 when the supply of operating power to the performance CPU 82 is started. In this case, there is no need to read the object data to the VRAM 86 at an appropriate timing.

(26) Drawing data for displaying an image on the first sub-display device 43 (hereinafter also referred to as first drawing data) and drawing data for displaying an image on the second sub-display device 44 (hereinafter referred to as second drawing data) In a configuration in which the first drawing data (also referred to as drawing data) is set in one frame area 117, 118, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are distributed between odd-numbered vertical lines and even-numbered vertical lines in the horizontal arrangement order. The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which drawing data is set in a distributed manner.

For example, the first drawing data may be set in the left half of one frame area 117, 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the right half. Further, for example, the first drawing data may be set in the upper half of one frame area 117, 118, and the second drawing data may be set in the lower half. Further, for example, the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set to be dispersed in odd-numbered horizontal lines and even-numbered horizontal lines in the vertical arrangement order in one frame area 117, 118. It may also be a configuration. Furthermore, the first drawing portion data forming part of the first drawing data and the second drawing portion data forming a part of the second drawing data are not arranged alternately in units of one line; A configuration may be adopted in which the minimum unit dots of one drawing data and the minimum unit dots of the second drawing data are arranged alternately in each of the vertical and horizontal directions.

(27) The number of dots of the first sub-display device 43 and the number of dots of the second sub-display device 44 are not limited to the same structure; The number of dots may be different from 44. In this case, the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the first drawing data and the number of dots included in the area reserved for setting the second drawing data in one frame area 117, 118. may have different configurations depending on the difference in the number of dots, or may have the same configuration.

(28) In a situation where one of the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display device 44 is hidden behind the center frame 42 and cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the other display device is A configuration may be adopted in which a situation in which it becomes visible may occur. In this case, the one display device hidden behind the center frame 42 may have a configuration in which no image is displayed. Even with this configuration, the drawing data for displaying an image on the other display device is set in a part of the area corresponding to the drawing data in one frame area 117, 118. In this configuration, the drawing data corresponding to one of the display devices may not be set, and although no image is displayed on the one display device, the drawing data corresponding to the one display device may be set. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the In the case of a configuration in which drawing data corresponding to one of the display devices is set, one frame area 117, 118 is set regardless of whether or not an image is displayed on one of the display devices. In contrast, both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set.

Further, one display device hidden behind the center frame 42 may be configured to display the same color. In this case, since the drawing data for displaying the same color is set as the drawing data corresponding to the one display device, the one display device is hidden behind the center frame 42. Both the first drawing data and the second drawing data will be set for one frame area 117, 118, regardless of whether or not the situation is such that the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set.

(29) When each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at the initial position, both may be hidden behind the center frame 42 and not be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, if each sub-display device 43, 44 is arranged at the initial position, no image is displayed on each sub-display device 43, 44; A configuration may be adopted in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set. Further, when each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 is arranged at the initial position, the same color is displayed on each of the sub-display devices 43 and 44, and the same color is displayed on one frame area 117 and 118. A configuration may be adopted in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are set for performing the drawing. In this case, the same color information (numeric information) will be set for all dots in the one frame area 117, 118.

(30) A configuration in which only the first drawing data is set in one frame area 117, 118 at a predetermined drawing timing, and only the second drawing data is set in the one frame area 117, 118 at another drawing timing. Good too. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a part of the frame areas 117 and 118 is an area for setting the first drawing data, and another area is an area for setting the second drawing data. If the drawing timing is to set one drawing data, the first drawing data is set over the entire one frame area 117, 118, and if the drawing timing is to set the second drawing data, the second drawing data is set to one frame area. It may be configured to be set over the entire frame areas 117 and 118.

(31) By inputting one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub-display device 43, and an image signal corresponding to one dot in the second drawing data is output. The configuration is not limited to output to the second sub-display device 44, and image signals corresponding to a plurality of dots in the first drawing data are output to the first sub-display device 43 by inputting one pulse of the clock signal. At the same time, a configuration may also be adopted in which image signals corresponding to a plurality of dots in the second drawing data are output to the second sub-display device 44. Further, the number of dots to be outputted as an image signal by inputting one pulse of the clock signal may be different between the first drawing data and the second drawing data.

Furthermore, by inputting one pulse of the clock signal, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the first drawing data is output to the first sub-display device 43, and by inputting the next one pulse, an image signal corresponding to one dot in the second drawing data is outputted to the first sub-display device 43. The configuration may be such that an image signal corresponding to the image signal is output to the second sub-display device 44. In this case, although the time required to complete the output of image signals for all dots in the first drawing data and the second drawing data will be longer, the output of image signals to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display It becomes possible to alternately output image signals to the display device 44.

(32) The number of dots may be different between the first drawing data and the second drawing data. In this case, in a situation where there are dots for which the output of the image signal is not completed in both the first drawing data and the second drawing data, the output of the image signal to the first sub-display device 43 and the second sub-display The output of image signals to the device 44 is performed alternately, and after the output of the image signal on the side with a smaller number of dots among the first drawing data and the second drawing data is completed, the output of the image signal on the side with a larger number of dots is completed. A configuration may be adopted in which only the output is repeated.

(33) The main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are all the target display devices for which the image data to be used is aggregated and set in one drawing list. The configuration is not limited, and the main display device 41 and the first sub-display device 43 may be collectively set, or the main display device 41 and the second sub-display device 44 may be configured. , a first sub-display device 43 and a second sub-display device 44. In a configuration in which four or more display devices are provided, the image data corresponding to the four or more display devices may be aggregated and set in one drawing list.

(34) The display order priority data is not limited to the configuration in which the display order priority data is also used as information for specifying the display devices 41, 43, 44 to be set in the drawing list, and the display devices 41, 43 to be set , 44 may be set in the drawing list. In this case, for example, the image data group corresponding to the main display device 41, the image data group corresponding to the first sub display device 43, and the image data group corresponding to the second sub display device 44 have the same display order priority data. It is also possible to have a configuration in which there is image data in which . In this configuration, the order of use of image data is set in advance according to the types of display devices 41, 43, and 44, such as main display device 41 → first sub display device 43 → second sub display device 44. Even if the same display order priority data exists among different display devices 41, 43, and 44, each image data can be used sequentially.

(35) Display target data and display order data are set in the execution target table for display control, and the configuration is limited to a configuration in which display order priority data is derived from the display target data and display order data. Instead, a configuration may be adopted in which display order priority data is set in the execution target table for display control. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load in that there is no need to derive display order priority data from display target data and display order data.

(36) The display contents of the rotation period image 153 are not limited to those in the above embodiments, and are arbitrary. For example, as the rotation period image 153, the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device A configuration may be adopted in which the same color is displayed throughout the display device 44, or a configuration in which a geometric pattern is displayed throughout the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44. You can also use it as

(37) During the period in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 rotate, the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 display an image with vertical and horizontal directionality, and the image is It may be configured such that the display is displayed without following the rotation of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so that the player recognizes that the display is displayed on a non-rotating surface. For example, at least one of a character image and a background image is displayed over the entirety of the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, and the image is displayed when the sub display devices 43, 44 rotate. may continue to be displayed in the same range while maintaining the vertical and horizontal directionality regardless. This makes it difficult for the player who is paying attention to the image to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating.

(38) When the sub display devices 43 and 44 slide horizontally or vertically in front of the main display device 41, the entire main display device 41, first sub display device 43, and second sub display device 44 The image may be displayed over the entire area, and may also be displayed without following the sliding movement of the sub-display devices 43 and 44 so that the player recognizes that the image is being displayed on a fixed surface. For example, at least one of a character image and a background image is displayed across the main display device 41, the first sub display device 43, and the second sub display device 44, and the image is displayed in accordance with the sliding motion of the sub display devices 43 and 44. may continue to be displayed in the same range while maintaining the vertical and horizontal directionality regardless. This makes it difficult for the player who is paying attention to the image to recognize that the sub display devices 43 and 44 are slidingly moving.

(39) The display period of the image that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are making a displacement operation is not limited to the rotation period in which the sub-display devices 43 and 44 are rotating. For example, the sliding movement of the sub display devices 43 and 44 may be continued from the time when they start sliding from the initial position until the sub display devices 43 and 44 are placed at the separation position. This makes it possible to displace the sub-display devices 43 and 44 from the initial position to the separation position without the player noticing, and it becomes possible to provide surprise to the player.

(40) The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of displaceable sub-display devices 43 and 44 are provided, and a configuration in which only one is provided may be used, or a configuration in which three or more are provided. .

(41) A configuration may be adopted in which the sub display devices 43 and 44 can rotate one or more times in a predetermined direction with the direction in which the display surface of the main display device 41 faces as the rotation axis.

(42) In a configuration in which the second operating port 34 is provided in the right side area of the game area PA, and in the high frequency support mode, the firing operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right side area, the high frequency support mode Also, the configuration may be such that the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub-side is displayed.

(43) Although the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub-side is changed according to the rotation mode of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the rotation speed of the right-handed notification image 143 on the sub-side is not changed. You can also use it as

(44) The abnormality notification image 176 may be displayed even in an area of the main display device 41 that can face the sub display devices 43, 44 during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43, 44. . In this case, it becomes possible to secure a wide area in which the abnormality notification image 176 can be displayed.

(45) If a notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43, 44, an abnormality notification corresponding to the notification target event is issued according to the order in which the notification target event occurs, regardless of the priority of the notification target event. A configuration may be adopted in which the images 176 are displayed one after another. In addition, instead of this configuration, when a notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the notification target event is processed according to the priority of the notification target event, regardless of the order of occurrence of the notification target event. A configuration may also be adopted in which the corresponding abnormality notification images 176 are displayed one after another.

(46) If a predetermined notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect on the sub display devices 43, 44, an abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event is displayed on the main display device 41, and the sub The display devices 43 and 44 may be configured to return to their initial positions. This makes it possible to draw attention to the abnormality notification image 176 displayed on the main display device 41.

(47) If a predetermined notification target event occurs during the execution period of the displacement effect of the sub display devices 43 and 44, the abnormality notification image 176 corresponding to the notification target event will be displayed on the sub display device 43 instead of the main display device 41. , 44 may be used. This makes it possible to make the abnormality notification image 176 stand out.

(48) A configuration may be adopted in which only 3D images using 3D image data are displayed. In this case, all image data corresponding to the main display device 41, the first sub-display device 43, and the second sub-display device 44 are arranged in a common world coordinate system, and drawing for the main display device 41 is performed from that state. A configuration may also be adopted in which the data, the drawing data for the first sub-display device 43, and the drawing data for the second sub-display device 44 are created separately. This eliminates the need to separately prepare world coordinate systems corresponding to each of the display devices 41, 43, and 44, making it possible to reduce the processing load.

(49) The camera (viewpoint) was configured to be set individually for each image data placed in the world coordinate system, but instead of this, a single camera (view point) for all image data placed in the world coordinate system A configuration may also be adopted in which cameras are set in common. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which color information such as texture mapping is set before projection.

(50) Instead of the configuration in which the presentation control device 80 is controlled by the distribution control board 71 based on the command sent from the main control device 60, the presentation control device 80 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 60. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 80 controls the distribution control board 71. Further, instead of the configuration in which the distribution control board 71 and the production control device 80 are provided separately, a configuration in which they are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of them is provided by the main control device 60. Alternatively, both functions may be integrated into the main control device 60.

(51) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. a first storage means (memory module 83) that stores information in advance;
a second storage means (VRAM86) that stores information read from the first storage means;
a storage specifying unit (a function of executing the processing of step S1007 and step S1008 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for specifying whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction is stored in the second storage unit;
When the storage specifying means specifies that the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is transferred from the first storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means. If the storage specifying unit specifies that the predetermined information has been transferred from the first storage unit, the transfer execution unit (which executes the processes of step S1009 and step S1010 in the advance transfer control unit 94) does not transfer the specified information from the first storage unit. function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, information stored in advance in the first storage means is transferred to the second storage means, so that when the information is used, the information is not read directly from the first storage means but is read from the second storage means. You can read it from . In this case, when the predetermined information is the target of the transfer instruction, if the predetermined information is not stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is read from the first storage means to the second storage means, If the predetermined information is already stored in the second storage means, the predetermined information is not transferred from the first storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined information from being further transferred from the first storage means even though the predetermined information has already been stored in the second storage means. It becomes possible to improve the efficiency of reading information from the .

Feature A2. In the case where the storage specifying means specifies that the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means, and the storage area of the second storage means in which the predetermined information is stored is the transfer instruction. If the storage area is a separate storage area that is different from the storage area specified in the storage area, the specified information stored in the separate storage area is used to store the specified information in the storage area of the storage destination. The gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising an execution means (a function of executing the process of step S1011 in the advance transfer control unit 94).

According to feature A2, when a transfer instruction is issued for predetermined information that has already been read into the second storage means, the predetermined information is copied between storage areas of the second storage means. This makes it possible to store the predetermined information in the storage area designated as the transfer instruction, while making it unnecessary to read the predetermined information further from the first storage means.

Feature A3. The storage specifying means uses a search information group (search table 125) in which a correspondence relationship between the type of storage area of the second storage unit and the type of information stored in the storage area is set. , the gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, characterized in that it specifies whether or not the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means.

According to feature A3, by providing the search information group, it is possible to efficiently identify whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of the transfer instruction has already been read into the second storage means. It becomes possible.

Feature A4. When the predetermined information is stored in the storage area of the storage destination specified by the transfer instruction in the second storage means, the correspondence between the type of the storage area of the storage destination and the type of the predetermined information is new. The game according to feature A3, further comprising a content updating means (a function of executing the process of step S1012 in the advance transfer control unit 94) for updating the content of the search information group so that the search information group is set to Machine.

According to feature A4, when information is transferred to the storage area of the second storage means, the content of the search information group is updated to reflect the correspondence between the storage area and the information. Ru. This makes it possible to match the contents of the search information group to the latest storage state of the second storage means.

Feature A5. In the transfer instruction, identification information (address ID) for specifying an area in the first storage means in which the predetermined information is stored is included as information for causing the transfer execution means to specify the type of the predetermined information. provided,
The game according to feature A3 or A4, wherein the identification information or information included in the identification information is set in the search information group as information for identifying the type of the predetermined information. Machine.

According to feature A5, the information provided in the transfer instruction is set in the search information group. As a result, when specifying whether or not the predetermined information that is the target of a transfer instruction is stored in the second storage means using the search information group, the information provided in the transfer instruction can be It can be used as is. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when performing the identification.

Feature A6. The identification information includes information corresponding to a start address of an area in which the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means,
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein information corresponding to the start address is set in the search information group as information for specifying the type of the predetermined information.

According to feature A6, since the information for specifying the type of predetermined information in the search information group is information corresponding to the start address, all addresses in the area where the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means It is possible to suppress the amount of information for specifying the type of predetermined information in the search information group, and the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means, compared to a configuration in which information corresponding to the predetermined information is included. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load when referring to the search information group in order to specify whether or not the search information group exists.

Feature A7. The predetermined information is information stored across a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means,
Feature A3, characterized in that the type information set for specifying the type of the storage area in the search information group is identification information for identifying the plurality of storage areas as a group of storage areas. The gaming machine according to any one of A6 to A6.

According to feature A7, since the plurality of storage areas in the second storage means are configured to be specified as a group of storage areas using identification information, it is possible to suppress the amount of information on type information in the search information group. becomes.

Feature A8. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
Information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order, and in the next storage process after the storage process of storing information in the storage area in the last order is performed, the storage in the first order is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized in that information is stored in the area.

According to feature A8, since the storage area of the second storage means is looped as a storage processing execution target, it is possible to make the storage capacity of the second storage means appropriate. Furthermore, since the plurality of storage areas of the second storage means are sequentially subjected to storage processing in accordance with a predetermined order, the processing configuration for specifying storage areas to be subjected to storage processing is simplified. becomes possible.

Feature A9. The first storage means stores arbitrary information (image data for starting fluctuation) used by the control means when a predetermined event that can occur at any timing in at least a predetermined situation occurs;
In a situation where the arbitrary information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the second storage means, the arbitrary information is It is characterized by comprising a memory maintenance means (a function for executing the processing of steps S903 to S906 in the production CPU 82) for storing data in the storage area targeted for execution of the storage processing in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to feature A8.

According to feature A9, even if the storage area of the second storage means is configured to loop as a storage processing execution target, arbitrary information continues to be stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation. This makes it possible to have the arbitrary information already read into the second storage means at the timing when the predetermined event occurs, and to read the arbitrary information from the first storage means to the second storage means at the timing when the predetermined event occurs. does not require the transfer of any information. In particular, according to this configuration, there is no need to prepare a dedicated storage area for storing arbitrary information in the second storage means, so the degree of freedom when using the storage area of the second storage means is increased. It will be done.

Feature A10. The memory maintenance means is characterized in that the arbitrary information stored in the predetermined storage area is used to store the arbitrary information in the storage area that is the target of the storage process in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to feature A9.

According to feature A10, in order to keep the arbitrary information stored in the second storage means in a predetermined situation, there is no need to periodically read out the arbitrary information from the first storage means. Therefore, it is possible to continue storing arbitrary information in the second storage means in a predetermined situation while increasing the efficiency of reading information.

Feature A11. The speed required for reading information from the second storage means is faster than when reading information from the first storage means,
Features A1 to A10 are characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with control means (2D control section 96, 3D control section 97) that executes control using the information transferred to the second storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature A11, information is read to the second storage means where the speed required for reading information is faster than when reading information from the first storage means, and the control means performs control using the read information. By executing this, the time required for reading information in the control means can be shortened. In this case, by providing the configuration described in feature A1, etc., it becomes possible to suitably transfer information to the second storage means.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features A1 to A11, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. a first storage means (memory module 83) that stores control information in advance;
a second storage means (VRAM86) that stores the control information read from the first storage means;
instruction control means (direction CPU 82) that provides instruction information (drawing list);
a transfer execution unit (pre-transfer control unit 94) that causes the control information specified in the instruction information to be read into the second storage unit;
control execution means (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that executes control using the control information according to the instruction information;
Equipped with
Storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area where the control information is stored in the first storage means is set in the instruction information provided by the instruction control means,
When the control information specified in the instruction information is read into the second storage means by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the transfer execution means transfers the control information specified in the instruction information to the second storage means. 2. Setting storage destination information (identification information) for specifying an area from which the control information has been read in the storage means in the instruction information;
The control execution means uses the instruction information after the storage destination information has been set by the transfer execution means to read out the control information specified in the instruction information. A gaming machine characterized in that the control information is read from a storage area of a storage means.

According to feature B1, when the control information is transferred to the second storage means according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, a Storage destination information is set in the instruction information. This eliminates the need to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, making it possible to suppress the amount of instruction information transmitted from the instruction control means. Furthermore, when the control information is actually transferred to the second storage means, information corresponding to the area of the second storage means to which the control information was transferred is set in the instruction information as storage destination information. It becomes possible to increase the reliability of the content of the destination information.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the transfer execution means sets the storage destination information by overwriting the storage source information of the instruction information.

According to feature B2, when the control information is transferred according to the storage source information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the second storage means to which the control information is transferred is transferred to the storage source. The instruction information is set to overwrite the information. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of instruction information provided to the control execution means after the transfer of the control information is completed.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the storage destination information has a smaller amount of information than the storage source information.

According to feature B3, it is possible to reduce the processing load when overwriting the storage destination information on the storage source information in the transfer execution means.

Feature B4. A storage area (pre-transfer storage area 121) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means, and a storage area (pre-transfer storage area 121) for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the transfer execution means has been completed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that a post-transfer storage area 122) and a post-transfer storage area 122) are distinguished from each other.

According to feature B4, the storage areas in which the instruction information provided from the instruction control means and the instruction information for which the transfer of the control information is completed and the storage destination information is set are clearly distinguished. , it becomes possible to clearly distinguish these instruction information.

Feature B5. As the control information, there is predetermined control information (decoded image data) that is not to be read into the second storage means,
When the predetermined control information is set in the instruction information, the transfer execution means performs a process for reading out the predetermined control information into the second storage means and performs the processing for reading the predetermined control information into the second storage means and the information corresponding to the predetermined control information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that both of the processes of setting storage destination information to the instruction information are not executed.

According to feature B5, for the predetermined control information that is not to be read into the second storage means, the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information by the transfer execution means, so that the storage destination information is set by the transfer execution means. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary execution.

Feature B6. The second storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
The configuration is such that information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order,
The transfer execution means includes:
When a transfer process is executed using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is in a predetermined order in the instruction information, the control information that is the target of the transfer process in the second storage means. means for setting information corresponding to the area from which is read out in the instruction information as the storage destination information (a function for executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94);
When a transfer process is executed using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is the next order with respect to the predetermined order in the instruction information, the second storage means corresponds to the predetermined order. means for setting in the instruction information, as the storage destination information, information corresponding to a difference in the address of the area from which the control information is read, which corresponds to the next order with respect to the area from which the control information is read; (Function to execute the process of step S1103 in advance transfer control unit 94);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B6, for control information in which the execution order of transfer processing in the instruction information is the next order with respect to a predetermined order, information corresponding to the difference in addresses is set as storage destination information. , it is possible to suppress the amount of storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature B7. The predetermined control information is configured to be stored across a plurality of storage areas in the second storage means,
When the predetermined control information is read into the plurality of storage areas by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the transfer execution means transfers the plurality of storage areas into a group. Features B1 to 3 are characterized in that the storage area includes means for setting identification information for identifying a storage area as the storage destination information in the instruction information (a function for executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94). The gaming machine according to any one of B6.

According to feature B7, since the plurality of storage areas in the second storage means are configured to be specified as a group of storage areas using identification information, the amount of information on the storage destination information set in the instruction information can be suppressed. becomes possible.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features B1 to B7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature group A and the feature group B, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are equipped with a control element such as a CPU and a read-only storage element such as a ROM, and execute a series of games based on the control element executing a process according to a program read from the read-only storage element. is controlled. Note that there are also known devices in which a control element, a read-only memory element, etc. are integrated into one chip.

Further, a configuration using a control element to perform sound output control and display control is also known. In this case, the operation of the controlled device is controlled based on the control element executing processing in accordance with data read from the read-only storage element.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably read information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance;
instruction control means (direction CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of the image to be displayed on the display means;
a display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data according to the contents instructed in the instruction information;
Equipped with
The instruction control means includes a plurality of providing means (a function of executing the processing of steps S907 to S921 in the production CPU 82) for providing a plurality of the instruction information in order to display an image at one update timing on the display means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature C1, a plurality of pieces of instruction information may be provided in order to display an image at one update timing. As a result, the amount of information for one piece of instruction information provided by the instruction control means becomes extremely large, or various pieces of information are mixed in one piece of instruction information, increasing the processing load on the display control means. It becomes possible to suitably provide instruction information while suppressing the occurrence of events such as storage.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the plurality of providing means sets the image data included in the first type and the image data included in the second type as objects of use in different instruction information. .

According to feature C2, image data usage instruction information is set in separate instruction information depending on the type of image data. As a result, the display control means only needs to execute processing corresponding to the type of instruction information, and the display control means can distinguish which type of image data to be used in the instruction information corresponds to. There is no need for the display control means to perform the process individually for each image data unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means.

Feature C3. The display control means includes:
first display control means (3D control unit 97) for displaying an image on the display means using data created based on arranging three-dimensional data as the image data in a virtual three-dimensional space;
a second display control means (2D control unit 96) for displaying an image on the display means using two-dimensional data rather than the three-dimensional data;
Equipped with
The image data included in the first type is data used by the first display control means, and the image data included in the second type is data used by the second display control means. The gaming machine according to feature C2.

The display control means performs different processing depending on whether an image is displayed using three-dimensional image data or when an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data. In this case, according to feature C3, the image data of the three-dimensional data and the image data of the two-dimensional data are not mixed and set in one instruction information, so the display control means can control the three-dimensional data and the image data of the two-dimensional data. It becomes possible to identify which two-dimensional data corresponds to each instruction information unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the display control means.

Feature C4. The instruction control means may display an image at one update timing on the display means when a predetermined number or more of the image data is used to display an image at one update timing on the display means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the number of the instruction information to be provided is larger than when less than a predetermined number of the image data is used.

According to feature C4, it is possible to prevent the number of image data set as objects of use in one piece of instruction information from becoming extremely large. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information of one piece of instruction information provided from the instruction control means to a certain extent, and prevents the transmission period of one piece of instruction information from becoming extremely long. .

Feature C5. When the plurality of instruction information is provided in order to display an image at one update timing on the display means, the plurality of instruction information is collectively used to display an image at one update timing on the display means. Aggregation information setting means for setting information indicating that the information is displayed (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S912 and step S918 in the performance CPU 82, and in the fourth embodiment, the step in the performance CPU 82) The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processes of S2506 to S2507 and S2513 to S2514.

According to feature C5, even if a plurality of pieces of instruction information are provided to display an image at one update timing, the display control means indicates that the plurality of pieces of instruction information are used collectively. Information for enabling identification is set by the instruction control means. This makes it possible for the display control means to understand that the plurality of instruction information is for displaying an image at one update timing.

Feature C6. When first instruction information and second instruction information are provided as the instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing on the display means, the display control means controls the first instruction information and the second instruction information. The game according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that the game is equipped with an aggregation means (a function of executing the process of step S2607 in the advance transfer control unit 94) that aggregates information into one instruction information. Machine.

According to feature C6, even if a plurality of pieces of instruction information are provided to the display control means in order to display an image at one update timing, the display control means aggregates the plurality of pieces of instruction information into one piece of instruction information. be done. This eliminates the need to refer to a plurality of pieces of instruction information when the display control means executes display control according to the instruction information.

Feature C7. The display control means includes a transfer execution means (pre-transfer control section 94) that causes the image data specified in the instruction information to be read into the read storage means (VRAM 86),
The aggregation means combines the first instruction information and the second instruction information into one piece of instruction information when the first instruction information and the second instruction information are subject to transfer processing by the transfer execution means. The gaming machine according to feature C6, characterized in that the gaming machine is aggregated.

According to feature C7, the image data specified in the instruction information is read out in advance into the reading storage means, thereby making it possible to increase the processing speed when using the image data in the display control means. In this case, multiple pieces of instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing are aggregated when the image becomes the target of transfer processing by the transfer execution means, so the pre-transfer trigger is set to multiple instructions. It can also be used as an opportunity to aggregate information.

Feature C8. The display control means includes a plurality of instruction information storage areas (first to twentieth storage areas 121a to 121t before transfer) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means,
When a plurality of pieces of instruction information are provided in order to display an image at one update timing on the display means, the plurality of pieces of instruction information are sequentially stored in a plurality of instruction information storage areas having consecutive addresses. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7.

According to feature C8, a plurality of pieces of instruction information for displaying an image at one update timing are stored in an instruction information storage area with consecutive addresses, thereby simplifying the processing configuration for reading out the plurality of pieces of instruction information. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features C1 to C8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention of feature C group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a first storage means (memory module 83) that stores information in advance;
a second storage means (VRAM86) that stores information read from the first storage means;
A control means (production LSI 85) that executes control using the information read into the second storage means;
Equipped with
The second storage means is provided with a plurality of storage areas, and address information is set in each of the plurality of storage areas,
The control means is a part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means and uses aggregate designation information (index number or identification information) for collectively specifying a plurality of storage areas. A gaming machine characterized in that information can be read from the plurality of storage areas.

According to feature D1, by using the aggregation designation information, it is possible to collectively read information from a plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregation designation information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information required to specify the storage area from which information is to be read, compared to specifying address information for each of the multiple storage areas and reading information from the multiple storage areas. becomes.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the storage areas to be aggregated and specified by the aggregate designation information have consecutive address information.

According to feature D2, it is possible to prevent the correspondence between the aggregation designation information and the storage areas designated thereby from becoming complicated.

Feature D3. The control means uses identification information different from the address information set to correspond to some storage areas of the plurality of storage areas corresponding to the aggregation designation information, to The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized in that information can be read from the area.

According to feature D3, even when multiple storage areas are collectively specified using aggregate specification information, information cannot be read from some of the storage areas. It becomes possible.

Feature D4. The control means includes:
reading means (transfer controller 92) for reading information from the storage area corresponding to the aggregation designation information in the second storage means;
control execution means (2D control section 96, 3D control section 97) that instructs the reading means to read information and executes control using the information read by the reading means;
Equipped with
The reading unit specifies the storage area corresponding to the read instruction by the control execution unit, using a correspondence information group (index table 128) in which a correspondence relationship between the aggregation designation information and the address information is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to feature D4, by using the configuration that uses the correspondence information group, it becomes possible to efficiently specify the type of storage area corresponding to the aggregate designation information in the reading means.

Feature D5. The control means includes a change means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2401 to S2403 in the pre-transfer control unit 94) capable of changing the relationship between the aggregation designation information and the plurality of storage areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

According to feature D5, the relationship between the aggregation specification information and a plurality of storage areas can be changed as necessary, so it is possible to flexibly use the aggregation specification of storage areas using the aggregation specification information. becomes.

Feature D6. The control means uses first aggregate designation information (index No. 1) for collectively designating a plurality of storage areas that are part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means. It is possible to read information from the plurality of storage areas, and a part of the storage areas provided in the second storage means is used for collectively specifying the plurality of storage areas. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein information can be read from the plurality of storage areas by using the second aggregate designation information (index No. 2).

According to feature D6, it becomes possible to distinguish the storage area of the second storage means into a plurality of aggregation areas. This makes it possible to set multiple aggregation areas depending on the purpose.

Feature D7. According to feature D6, the number of storage areas specified by the first aggregation specification information and the number of storage areas specified by the second aggregation specification information can be made different. Game machine.

According to feature D7, in a configuration in which a plurality of aggregation areas can be set according to the purpose, the degree of freedom in setting each aggregation area can be increased.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features D1 to D7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention of feature D group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are equipped with a control element such as a CPU and a read-only storage element such as a ROM, and execute a series of games based on the control element executing a process according to a program read from the read-only storage element. is controlled. Note that there are also known devices in which a control element, a read-only memory element, etc. are integrated into one chip.

Further, a configuration using a control element to perform sound output control and display control is also known. In this case, the operation of the controlled device is controlled based on the control element executing processing in accordance with data read from the read-only storage element.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably read information from the storage means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance;
instruction control means (direction CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of the image to be displayed on the display means;
a display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data according to the contents instructed in the instruction information;
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
a first control means (pre-transfer control section 94) that executes first control necessary for displaying an image on the display means according to predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means;
a second control unit (2D control unit 96, 3D control unit 97) that executes second control necessary for displaying an image on the display unit according to the predetermined instruction information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, the control means for executing the first control according to predetermined instruction information and the control means for executing the second control according to the predetermined instruction information are separately provided as the first control means and the second control means. It is being This makes it possible to distribute the processing load compared to a configuration in which both the first control and the second control are executed together in one control means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the second control means executes the second control according to the predetermined instruction information after the first control is to be executed by the first control means. .

According to feature E2, the predetermined instruction information is sequentially used by the first control means and the second control means. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects described above without providing multiple pieces of the same instruction information from the instruction control means.

Feature E3. comprising readout storage means (VRAM86) for storing the image data read out from the image information storage means;
The first control means causes the image data set to be used in the predetermined instruction information to be read into the read storage means,
The second control means causes the display means to display an image based on the use of the image data read into the read storage means according to the content instructed in the predetermined instruction information. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2.

According to feature E3, the control for reading out the image data and reading it into the storage means according to the predetermined instruction information is performed by the first control means, and the control for displaying the image by using the image data according to the predetermined instruction information is performed by the second control. done in the means. In this case, in a configuration in which the processing load is distributed between the first control means and the second control means, it is possible to clearly differentiate the control contents executed by each of the first control means and the second control means. .

Feature E4. The first control means controls the predetermined control means in a situation where the second control means is performing a process of displaying an image on the display means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at a predetermined update timing. According to feature E3, the image data is read into the read storage means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at an update timing later than the update timing of . gaming machines.

According to feature E4, image data to be used thereafter is read out and stored under control of the first control means independent of the period during which the second control means is performing the process of displaying an image. It becomes possible to transfer the information to the means in advance.

Feature E5. Storage source information (address ID) for specifying an area where the image data is stored in the image information storage means is set in the instruction information provided by the instruction control means,
When the image data specified in the instruction information is read into the readout storage means by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the first control means controls the readout storage. setting storage destination information (identification information) for specifying an area from which the image data is read in the instruction information in the means;
The second control means utilizes the instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the first control means to control the readout from which the image data specified in the instruction information is read. The gaming machine according to feature E3 or E4, characterized in that the image data is read from a storage area of the storage means.

According to feature E5, when image data is read and transferred to the storage means according to the storage source information set in the instruction information, the storage destination information for specifying the area where the image data is stored in the readout storage means is It is set in the instruction information. This eliminates the need to set both the storage source information and the storage destination information in the instruction information from the beginning, making it possible to suppress the amount of instruction information transmitted from the instruction control means. In addition, when image data is actually transferred to the readout storage means, information corresponding to the area of the readout storage means to which the image data was transferred is set in the instruction information as the storage destination information, so the content of the storage destination information is It becomes possible to increase the reliability of

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the first control means sets the storage destination information by overwriting the storage source information of the instruction information.

According to feature E6, when image data is transferred according to the storage source information of the instruction information, the storage destination information corresponding to the area of the read storage means to which the image data is transferred overwrites the storage source information. is set in the instruction information. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of instruction information provided to the second control means after the transfer of the control information is completed.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the storage destination information has a smaller amount of information than the storage source information.

According to feature E7, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the first control means overwrites the storage source information with the storage destination information.

Feature E8. A storage area (pre-transfer storage area 121) for storing the instruction information provided by the instruction control means, and a storage area for storing the instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the first control means has been completed. (post-transfer storage area 122), and the gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7.

According to feature E8, by clearly distinguishing the storage areas in which the instruction information provided by the instruction control means and the instruction information in which the image data transfer is completed and the storage destination information is set, It becomes possible to clearly distinguish these instruction information.

Feature E9. As the image data, there is predetermined image data (decoded image data) that is not to be read into the read storage means,
When the predetermined image data is set as a usage target in the instruction information, the first control means performs a process for reading out the predetermined image data into the read storage means and performs the processing as information corresponding to the predetermined image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E8, characterized in that neither of the processes of setting storage destination information to the instruction information is executed.

According to feature E9, since the storage destination information is not set in the instruction information by the first control means for the predetermined image data that is not to be read into the readout storage means, the storage destination information is set by the first control means. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary execution.

Feature E10. The read storage means has a plurality of storage areas,
The configuration is such that information is sequentially stored in the plurality of storage areas according to a predetermined order,
The first control means includes:
When a transfer process is executed using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process is in a predetermined order in the instruction information, the image data that was the target of the transfer process is read in the read storage means. means for setting information corresponding to the output area in the instruction information as the storage destination information (a function for executing the process of step S1102 in the advance transfer control unit 94);
When a transfer process is executed using the storage source information in which the execution order of the transfer process in the instruction information is the next order with respect to the predetermined order, the read storage means corresponds to the predetermined order. Means for setting information corresponding to the difference in addresses of the area from which the image data is read out, which corresponds to the next order with respect to the area from which the image data is read out, in the instruction information as the storage destination information (pre-transfer) a function of executing the process of step S1103 in the control unit 94);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E9.

According to feature E10, for image data whose execution order of transfer processing is the next order with respect to a predetermined order in the instruction information, information corresponding to the difference in addresses is set as storage destination information. It is possible to suppress the amount of storage destination information set in the instruction information.

Feature E11. The specific image data is configured to be stored across a plurality of storage areas in the readout storage means,
When the specific image data has been read into the plurality of storage areas by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the first control means may configure the plurality of storage areas into a group of storage areas. Features E5 to E10, characterized in that they include means (a function for executing the process of step S1102 in the pre-transfer control unit 94) for setting identification information for identifying the area as the storage destination information in the instruction information. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature E11, since the plurality of storage areas in the read storage means are configured to be identified as a group of storage areas using identification information, it is possible to suppress the amount of information on the storage destination information set in the instruction information. It becomes possible.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features E1 to E11, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. Display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance;
display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means using the image data;
Equipped with
The image information storage means stores reference data (I special video data (special video data 185) that does not include difference data (B picture data, P picture data) that can provide a difference with respect to the reference data when the decoding process is executed; ) is stored therein.

According to feature F1, special moving image data that does not include difference data but includes reference data is provided, so that decoded image data created by performing decoding processing on the special moving image data is normally The image quality can be higher than that of the decoded image data created by performing decoding processing on the moving image data. In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to treat image data having the same image quality as normal still image data as moving image data. As a result, it is possible to use image data having the same image quality as the normal still image data without using an area for reading the normal still image data.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the special moving image data includes a plurality of the reference data.

According to feature F2, by performing decoding processing on special moving image data, it is possible to create a plurality of image data having image quality comparable to that of normal still image data.

Feature F3. The game according to feature F2, wherein a plurality of decoded image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data are used according to a usage order determined in the special moving image data. Machine.

According to feature F3, when using a plurality of decoded image data created from special moving image data, there is no need to set the order of use of the decoded image data separately from the special moving image data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for setting the order of use of image data, compared to a configuration in which decoded image data is stored in advance in the image information storage means as normal still image data.

Feature F4. comprising a decoding means (video decoder 95) for performing the decoding process on the special video data;
The decoding means is configured to display the special moving image in a situation where the display control means is executing a process for displaying an image at an update timing earlier than an update timing at which an image using the decoded image data is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the decoding process is executed on data.

According to feature F4, during a period when the display control means is executing processing for displaying an image using other image data, the special moving image is displayed by the decoding means provided separately from the display control means. Image data decoding processing is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the period during which the decoding process is being executed from becoming an image display waiting period while not increasing the processing load on the display control means.

Feature F5. The image information storage means stores attached image data in correspondence with the special moving image data,
The gaming machine includes a decoding means (video decoder 95) that performs the decoding process on the special image data,
The decoding means executes the decoding process on the special moving image data in a situation where the display control means is executing a process for displaying an image using the attached image data. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F4.

According to feature F5, the special moving image data is decoded in a situation where processing for displaying an image using attached image data corresponding to the special moving image data is executed. It becomes possible to perform the decoding process of the special moving image data by using the period during which the process for displaying the image corresponding to the image is being executed.

Feature F6. The attached image data displays an image corresponding to the latest update timing with respect to an image displayed using the first decoded image data to be used among the decoded image data created from the special moving image data. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the gaming machine is image data for playing.

According to feature F6, in a configuration in which decoding processing of special moving image data is executed using a period in which processing for displaying an image using attached image data is being executed, the display using attached image data is performed. It becomes possible to ensure continuity between the image displayed using the decoded image data and the image displayed using the decoded image data.

Feature F7. The display control means includes a predetermined process execution means (step S810 in the 3D control unit 97) that displays an image corresponding to the predetermined image data by executing a predetermined process on the predetermined image data stored in the image information storage means. function),
When displaying an image corresponding to the decoded image data created by performing the decoding process on the special video data, the predetermined process is executed on the decoded image data by the predetermined process execution means. The configuration is
When the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is read from the image information storage means to a readout storage means (VRAM 86, register 93),
The readout storage means is characterized in that it includes a first readout area (VRAM 86) in which the predetermined image data is stored, and a second readout area (register 93) in which the decoded image data is read out. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6.

According to feature F7, when image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not used directly from the image information storage means, but is used after being read out once into the readout storage means. Therefore, by reading the image data into the reading storage means in advance, when the image data is used in the display control means, it becomes possible to use the image data immediately. Further, the readout storage means is provided with a first readout area from which predetermined image data is read out and a second readout area from which decoded image data of the special moving image data is readout, so that it can be adapted to suit each purpose. Therefore, when using image data in the display control means, it becomes possible to specify the area according to the type of image data.

In this case, special image data that has the configuration of the feature F1 and does not include differential data is stored in the image information storage means. As a result, the special image data is read out to the second readout area instead of the first readout area, so there is no need to reserve an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature F8. A plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the image information storage means,
The gaming machine is
a first readout execution unit that reads all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data into the first readout area when a predetermined readout timing comes;
In a situation where decoded image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second readout area, decoded image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second readout area. a second readout execution means for overwriting the decoded image data on the decoded image data already stored in the second readout area;
The gaming machine according to feature F7, comprising:

According to feature F8, all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out to the first readout area, so there is no need to read out the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, decoded image data is read into the second readout area as needed, and when new decoded image data is created, the second readout area is overwritten. This makes it possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the second read area. In this case, special image data that has the configuration of the feature F1 and does not include differential data is stored in the image information storage means. As a result, the special image data is read out to the second readout area instead of the first readout area, so there is no need to reserve an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature F9. The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the first reading execution means reads all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data into the first reading area when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature F9, it is possible to quickly create a state in which all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read out to the first readout area.

Feature F10. In any one of features F1 to F9, the decoded image data created by performing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image. The game machine described.

According to feature F10, when using texture data, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features F1 to F10, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Display means for displaying images (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance;
Drawing data is created based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first sub frame area 117, second sub frame area 118), and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is sent to the display means. Display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the output;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A first display means (first sub-display device 43) and a second display means (second sub-display device 44) are provided as the display means,
The display control means creates first drawing data for displaying an image on the first display means in a partial area of the setting storage means, and creates first drawing data for displaying an image on the second display means. Aggregation setting means for setting 2 drawing data in another area of the setting storage means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing drawing processing to a drawing area for sub-display in the 2D control unit 96; A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a function of executing drawing data synthesis processing for sub-display in a 3D control unit 97.

According to feature G1, first drawing data for displaying an image on the first display means and second drawing data for displaying an image on the second display means are created in the same setting storage means. This makes it possible to reduce the number of setting storage means even when there are multiple display means, and allows image display on multiple display means while simplifying the hardware configuration for accessing the setting storage means. It becomes possible to realize this.

Feature G2. A part of the area of the setting storage means where the first drawing data is created is defined as a first setting area (area of odd lines), and a part of the setting storage means where the second drawing data is created. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that the other area is defined as a second setting area (area of even-numbered lines).

According to feature G2, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the area in which the first drawing data is set is fixed in the setting storage means. At the same time, the area in which the second drawing data is set in the setting storage means is fixed. This eliminates the need to allocate an area in the setting storage means each time the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created, making it possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Feature G3. The first drawing part data forming part of the first drawing data exists between a plurality of second drawing part data forming part of the second drawing data, and the second drawing part data exists between the plurality of second drawing part data forming a part of the second drawing data. The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the arrangement order of the data in the setting storage means is set so that the data exists between the first drawing portion data.

According to feature G3, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, each of the first drawing data and the second drawing data is stored in the entire setting storage means. It becomes possible to set the settings in a distributed manner.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the first drawing portion data and the second drawing portion data are arranged alternately in the data arrangement order in at least a predetermined direction in the setting storage means.

According to feature G4, since the first drawing portion data and the second drawing portion data are arranged alternately, each drawing portion data can be outputted as an image signal only in accordance with the order in which they are arranged in a predetermined direction. , it becomes possible to alternately output image signals to the first display means and the second display means.

Feature G5. In any one of features G1 to G4, the aggregation setting means causes both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be set in the setting storage means. The game machine described.

According to feature G5, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the period for creating the first drawing data and the period for creating the second drawing data are different. It is possible to duplicate them.

Feature G6. The aggregation setting means is characterized in that both the first drawing data and the second drawing data to be used are set in the setting storage means at the same update timing. The gaming machine described in feature G5.

In feature G6, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, the images on both the first display means and the second display means are updated at one update timing. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature G7. The display control means controls the image signal corresponding to the first drawing unit data constituting a part of the first drawing data and a part of the second drawing data based on the occurrence of one signal output trigger. Features G1 to G6 include a signal output means (a function for executing signal output processing in the second display circuit 99) for outputting the image signal corresponding to the second drawing unit data constituting the image signal. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature G7, both the output of the image signal to the first display means and the output of the image signal to the second display means are performed based on one occurrence of the signal output trigger. As a result, in a configuration in which both the first drawing data and the second drawing data are created in the same setting storage means, updating of the image on the first display means and updating of the image on the second display means are started simultaneously. This makes it possible to proceed simultaneously.

Feature G8. The game according to feature G7, wherein the first drawing unit data is the smallest unit of data in the first drawing data, and the second drawing unit data is the smallest unit of data in the second drawing data. Machine.

According to feature G8, in the configuration in which both the output of the image signal to the first display means and the output of the image signal to the second display means are performed based on one occurrence of a signal output trigger, Since the data to which the signal is output is the smallest unit of data, it is possible to prevent the execution period of image signal output processing for one signal output opportunity from becoming extremely long.

Feature G9. The first drawing unit data and the second drawing unit data to which the image signal is output based on one signal output trigger are set in an adjacent order in the data arrangement order in the setting storage means. The gaming machine according to feature G7 or G8.

According to feature G9, by simply setting adjacent drawing unit data in the setting storage means as output targets of image signals in response to one signal output trigger, the image signals can be output to the first display means in response to one signal output trigger. It becomes possible to perform both the output of the image signal and the output of the image signal to the second display means.

Feature G10. The first drawing data is created using the image data read from the image information storage means to create the first drawing data,
According to any one of features G1 to G9, the second drawing data is created using the image data read from the image information storage means to create the second drawing data. gaming machines.

According to feature G10, the first drawing data is individually created using the image data, and the second drawing data is individually created using the image data. This eliminates the need to previously store image data for creating both the first drawing data and the second drawing data in the image information storage means.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features G1 to G10, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Display means for displaying images (main display device 41, first sub display device 43, second sub display device 44);
image information storage means (memory module 83) that stores image data in advance;
instruction control means (direction CPU 82) for providing instruction information (drawing list) for instructing the content of the image to be displayed on the display means;
A setting storage means (first frame area for main 114, second frame area for main 115, first frame area for sub 117, second frame area for sub 118) stores the image data according to the contents instructed in the instruction information. ); display control means (production LSI 85) for displaying an image on the display means based on the setting;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A first display means (first sub-display device 43) and a second display means (second sub-display device 44) are provided as the display means,
The instruction control means includes, as the instruction information, information specifying the image data to be used for displaying an image on the first display means and information specifying the image data to be used for displaying an image on the second display means. 35. A gaming machine characterized in that it can provide aggregate instruction information (drawing list shown in FIG. 35) in which both of the information specifying the image data are aggregated and set.

According to feature H1, information for displaying images on a plurality of display means is provided to the display control means in a state where it is aggregated into aggregation instruction information. This makes it possible to reduce the number of instruction information provided from the instruction control means to the display control means, compared to a configuration in which instruction information is provided individually for each of the plurality of display means.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein information for displaying an image on each of the first display means and the second display means at the same update timing is set in the aggregation instruction information. .

According to feature H2, since the information for displaying images on each display means at the same update timing is aggregated and set in the aggregation instruction information, the display control means can display all the information set in the aggregation instruction information. It is sufficient to treat the information as information for displaying an image at one update timing, and there is no need to perform processing to determine which update timing the information corresponds to among multiple different update timings. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the processing performed by the display control means using the aggregation instruction information.

Feature H3. The instruction information specifies a plurality of image data to be used,
The display control means stores the plurality of image data specified as targets for use in the instruction information in the setting memory in an order according to setting order information (display order priority data) set in the instruction information. It is a configuration that is set sequentially to the means,
In the aggregation instruction information, it is determined in the setting order which of the first display means and the second display means the image data designated to be used is data for displaying the image on. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, characterized in that the specification is made using information.

According to feature H3, by using setting order information for specifying the setting order of image data by the display control means, it is possible to determine which display means the image data designated as the target of use corresponds to. be identified. This eliminates the need to set dedicated information for specifying the type of display means to be set in the aggregation instruction information, making it possible to reduce the number of types of information set in the aggregation instruction information. .

Feature H4. In the aggregation instruction information, the setting order information corresponding to the image data to be used for displaying an image on the first display means is a group of information in a first order range (equal to or greater than the first display target reference value). The setting order information corresponding to the image data to be used in order to display an image on the second display means in the aggregation instruction information is included in the second display target reference value), and the setting order information corresponds to the second order range. The gaming machine according to feature H3, characterized in that the gaming machine is included in the information group (a value equal to or higher than the second display target reference value).

According to feature H4, in a configuration in which the type of display means to be set is specified using setting order information, the setting order determines which display means the image data specified as the target of use corresponds to. Clearly differentiated in information. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the type of display means to be set in the display control means.

Feature H5. The instruction control means includes instruction information creation means (a function for executing drawing list creation processing in the performance CPU 82) that creates the instruction information by referring to a reference information group (an execution target table for display control),
The reference information group includes type information (display target data) corresponding to the type of display means to be displayed, as information for specifying the type of image data to be used in the instruction information creation means; Individual order information (display order data) corresponding to the setting order in the setting storage means is set for the plurality of types of image data to be used by the display means to be displayed,
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or H4, wherein the instruction information creation means derives the setting order information based on the type information and the individual order information.

According to characteristic H5, setting order information is not set as is in the reference information group, but type information and individual order information are set, and setting order information is set using these type information and individual order information. This is the configuration from which is derived. As a result, when setting a reference information group at the gaming machine design stage, it is only necessary to set the type of display means to be set and the setting order among the multiple types of image data to be used by the display means. , there is no need to set final configuration order information. Therefore, design work is facilitated.

Feature H6. The instruction information creation means executes predetermined arithmetic processing (processing of step S1305 and step S1306 in the performance CPU 82) using the numerical information corresponding to the type information on the numerical information corresponding to the individual order information. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein numerical information derived by the predetermined calculation process is used as the setting order information.

According to feature H6, when deriving setting order information using the type information and individual order information set in the reference information group, predetermined arithmetic processing is performed using the type information and individual order information. Since it is only necessary to perform the following steps, it is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the setting order information.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features H1 to H6, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, and the feature H group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. Predetermined display means (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44) for displaying images;
Displacement drive control means for displacing the predetermined display means (a function for executing the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73);
Display control means (presentation CPU 82, presentation LSI 85) that executes display control of the predetermined display means;
Equipped with
In a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation, the display control means generates a displacement corresponding image (rotation period image 153) that makes it difficult for a player to identify that the predetermined display means is performing a displacement operation. ) is displayed on the predetermined display means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1810 to S1812 in the performance CPU 82, a 2D control section 96, and a 3D control section 97). Machine.

According to feature I1, in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation, the predetermined display means displays a displacement corresponding image that makes it difficult for the player to identify that the predetermined display means is performing the displacement operation. Ru. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the predetermined display means is displaced without the player noticing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature I2. The predetermined displacement operation is a predetermined rotational movement in the predetermined display means,
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the displacement corresponding image is an image having no directionality in a direction along the display surface of the predetermined display means.

According to feature I2, the displacement-compatible image is an image that has no directionality in the direction along the display surface of the predetermined display means, so that the displacement-compatible image is an image that does not have directionality in the direction along the display surface of the predetermined display means, so that the displacement-compatible image By displaying the displacement corresponding image, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to discern that the predetermined display means is rotating.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the displacement-compatible image is displayed in such a way that the player recognizes that the displacement-compatible image is displayed on a non-displacement display surface.

According to feature I3, since the displacement-compatible image is displayed in such a way that the player recognizes that it is being displayed on a non-displacement display surface, it is not possible for the player to know that the predetermined display means is performing a displacement operation. It is possible to make it difficult to identify.

More specifically, regarding the configuration of feature I3, "the displacement-compatible image is a member that does not follow the predetermined display means around the predetermined display means when the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. An example of this is a configuration in which the display orientation is not changed due to the relationship between the two.

Feature I4. Comprising a specific display means (main display device 41) for displaying an image,
The predetermined display means displays a display surface of the specific display means and a display surface of the predetermined display means from the front of the gaming machine at a position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means from the direction in which the display surface faces. The predetermined displacement operation is performed in a predetermined posture in which both of the above are visible,
The displacement response control means is configured to display the displacement response image in an area existing around the display surface of the specific display means on the display surface of the specific display means when the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that an image corresponding to the above is displayed.

According to feature I4, in a situation where a predetermined display means is performing a predetermined displacement operation, a part of the display surface of the specific display means exists around the display surface of the predetermined display means, and a part of the display surface In this area, an image corresponding to the displacement-corresponding image on the predetermined display means is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to display an image related to the displacement corresponding image displayed on the predetermined display means around the predetermined display means performing a predetermined displacement operation, and the predetermined display means and the specific display means It becomes possible to perform an integrated display performance.

Feature I5. The predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation in a situation where the predetermined display means is placed at a position where the display surface of the specific display means is present over the entire periphery of the display surface of the predetermined display means. The gaming machine according to feature I4.

According to feature I5, it is possible to give the player an illusion that the display surface of the predetermined display means is a part of the display surface of the specific display means, and it is possible to make the player realize that the predetermined display means is performing a displacement operation. This makes it easier to display images that make it difficult for people to recognize them.

Feature I6. The predetermined response control means is configured to, when the predetermined display means is performing the predetermined displacement operation, cause the displacement response image to straddle the boundary between the display surface of the specific display means and the display surface of the predetermined display means. The gaming machine according to feature I4 or I5, wherein images having continuity are displayed on the specific display means and the predetermined display means.

According to feature I6, since the image of the specific display means displayed around the predetermined display means and the image displayed on the predetermined display means are displayed so as to have continuity, it is possible to pay attention to these images. It becomes difficult for the player who is playing the game to recognize that the predetermined display means is making a displacement operation.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, characterized in that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means is different depending on the timing of starting the predetermined displacement operation and the timing of ending the predetermined displacement operation.

According to feature I7, in a situation where a displacement compatible image is displayed that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is displacing, the predetermined display means performs a displacement operation and the arrangement state of the predetermined display means is changed. It is expected that the player will recognize that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means has been changed without realizing it, and it will be possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

Feature I8. The display control means displays, on the predetermined display means, an image (parallel period image 152) that allows the player to easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means before the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. and means for displaying on the predetermined display means an image (separation period image 154) that makes it easy for the player to recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means after the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. The gaming machine according to feature I7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of steps S1806 to S1808 and steps S1814 to S1816 in the CPU 82, a 2D control section 96, and a 3D control section 97).

According to feature I8, before and after the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation, an image that allows the player to easily recognize the arrangement state of the predetermined display means is displayed on the predetermined display means, and when the predetermined display means performs the predetermined displacement operation. In a situation where the player is performing a displacement operation, a displacement corresponding image is displayed on the predetermined display means in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the predetermined display means is performing a displacement operation. This makes it possible to give the player a strong impression that the arrangement state of the predetermined display means has been changed without him noticing.

Feature I9. A first display means (first sub-display device 43) and a second display means (second sub-display device 44) are provided as the predetermined display means,
The displacement drive control means causes the first display means and the second display means to start the predetermined displacement operation in a state where the first display means and the second display means are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction. The game according to any one of features I1 to I8, characterized in that the predetermined displacement operation is completed in a state where the first display means and the second display means are arranged in parallel in a direction different from the predetermined direction. Machine.

According to feature I9, the juxtaposition directions of the first display means and the second display means are different before and after the predetermined displacement operation. In this case, by displaying a displacement corresponding image in a situation where a predetermined displacement operation is being performed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the first display means and the second display means are performing a predetermined displacement operation. . As a result, it is expected that the player will recognize that the direction in which the first display means and the second display means are arranged side by side has been changed without noticing it, and it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features I1 to I9, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Predetermined display means (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44) for displaying images;
Rotary drive control means (a function for executing the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73) for rotating the predetermined display means;
Display control means (presentation CPU 82, presentation LSI 85) that executes display control of the predetermined display means;
Equipped with
The display control means includes an annular notification control means (a right-hand notification in the presentation CPU 82) that displays on the predetermined display means an annular notification image in which character images for notification are arranged in a ring (a right-hand notification image 143 on the sub side). 1. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a function for executing a setting process, a 2D control section 96, and a 3D control section 97).

According to feature J1, by performing a rotating operation on the predetermined display means, it is possible to give surprise to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the character images for notification are arranged in a ring. Thereby, even in a situation where the predetermined display means is performing a specific rotation operation, it is possible for the player to recognize the content of the text image for notification.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the annular notification control means displays the annular notification image as if it were rotating.

According to feature J2, since the annular notification image is displayed as if it is rotating, the player can see the annular notification image in a predetermined display direction regardless of the rotational position of the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to visually recognize the image.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the annular notification control means changes the rotation display mode of the annular notification image according to the operation mode of the rotation operation in the predetermined display means.

According to feature J3, since the rotation display mode of the annular notification image is changed according to the operation mode of the rotation operation in the predetermined display means, the rotation display mode of the annular notification image is changed regardless of the operation mode of the rotation operation in the predetermined display means. It is possible to make the display content of the notification image easy for the player to recognize.

Note that for the configuration of any one of features J1 to J3, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Specific display means (main display device 41) for displaying images;
Predetermined display means (first sub-display device 43, second sub-display device 44) for displaying images;
Displacement control means for displacing the predetermined display means to a predetermined opposing position facing a part of the display surface of the specific display means from the direction in which the display surface faces (a function for executing the process of step S303 in the distribution side MPU 73) )and,
When a notification target event occurs in a situation where control by the displacement control means is executed such that the predetermined display means is disposed at the predetermined opposing position, a specific notification image (abnormality notification image 176) is displayed in the specific display. An information control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 in the production CPU 82, a 2D control section 96, a 3D control section 97), which is displayed on the means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, even in a situation where control is being executed so that the predetermined display means is arranged at a predetermined opposing position, a specific notification image when a notification target event occurs is displayed on the specific display means. . As a result, even if the predetermined display means is not placed at the predetermined opposing position due to some kind of malfunction, the specific notification image will be displayed on the specific display means, and the specific notification image will be displayed to players and game hall managers. It becomes possible to make it recognized.

Feature K2. When the notification target event occurs in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined opposing position, the notification control means is configured to control an area on the display surface of the specific display means that is not facing the predetermined display means. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein at least a part of the specific notification image is displayed.

According to feature K2, it is possible to prevent the specific notification image from being completely hidden by the predetermined display means. Thereby, even in a situation where the predetermined display means are arranged at a predetermined opposing position, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the specific notification image displayed on the specific display means.

Feature K3. The displacement control means displaces the predetermined display means so that the predetermined facing position changes during a predetermined displacement period,
The notification control means is configured to control, when the notification target event occurs during the predetermined displacement period, an area of the display surface of the specific display device that does not face the predetermined display device throughout the predetermined displacement period. The gaming machine according to feature K2, characterized in that the specific notification image is displayed.

According to feature K3, the specific notification image is displayed in an area that does not face the predetermined display means throughout the predetermined displacement period, so that the display position of the specific notification image is changed according to the position of the predetermined display means. It is possible to ensure the visibility of the specific notification image displayed on the specific display means without performing control such as changing the information.

Feature K4. There are multiple types of notification target events,
There are multiple types of specific notification images corresponding to the notification target event,
Features K1 to K3 are characterized in that the notification control means limits the number of the specific notification images to be displayed to a predetermined number in a situation where the predetermined display means is arranged at the predetermined opposing position. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature K4, in a situation where the area for displaying specific notification images on the specific display means is limited, the number of specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number. It becomes possible to secure the size of the specific notification image to be displayed to a certain extent.

Feature K5. Priorities are set for the plurality of types of notification target events to be displayed in the specific notification image,
When the number of notification target events exceeding the predetermined number is occurring in a situation where the predetermined display unit is disposed at the predetermined opposing position, the notification control means may control the notification target of the higher priority side to The gaming machine according to feature K4, characterized in that the specific notification image corresponding to an event is displayed.

According to feature K5, even if the number of specific notification images to be displayed is limited to a predetermined number in a situation where the predetermined display means are arranged at predetermined opposing positions, the notification target with a higher priority It becomes possible to display a specific notification image corresponding to an event.

Feature K6. The notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display a predetermined notification image (common notification image 175) when the notification target event occurs in a situation where the predetermined display means are arranged at the predetermined opposing position. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5.

According to feature K6, not only the specific notification image is displayed on the specific display means, but also the predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display means, so that it is possible to emphasize that the notification target event has occurred. Become.

Feature K7. The gaming machine according to feature K6, wherein the predetermined notification image is a common image that does not correspond to the type of the notification target event.

According to feature K7, the predetermined display means does not display an image corresponding to the type of notification target event, but displays a common image that does not correspond to the type of notification target event as the predetermined notification image. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load for causing the means to display the predetermined notification image.

Feature K8. The gaming machine according to feature K6 or K7, wherein the notification control means causes the predetermined display means to display only one predetermined notification image even if the notification target event occurs multiple times. .

According to feature K8, only one predetermined notification image is displayed on the predetermined display means even if the number of occurrences of the notification target event is plural, so that images other than the predetermined notification image are displayed on the predetermined display means. It becomes possible to secure a wide area for

Note that for the configuration of any one of features K1 to K8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B7, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E11, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G10 , features H1 to H6, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J3, and features K1 to K8. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature I group, the feature J group, and the feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. becomes.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 41... Main display device, 43... First sub-display device, 44... Second sub-display device, 73... Sorting side MPU, 82... CPU for presentation, 83... Memory module, 85... LSI for presentation , 86...VRAM, 92...Transfer controller, 93...Register, 94...Pre-transfer control section, 95...Movie decoder, 96...2D control section, 97...3D control section, 114...First frame area for main, 115...Main 117... First frame area for sub, 118... Second frame area for sub, 121... Storage area for before transfer, 121a to 121t... First to 20th storage area for before transfer, 122... Storage area for after transfer, 125... Search table, 128... Index table, 143... Sub side right hit notification image, 152... Image for parallel period, 153... Image for rotation period, 154... Image for separation period, 175... Common notification image, 176... Abnormality notification image, 185... Special moving image data.

Claims (1)

a display means for displaying an image;
image information storage means for storing image data in advance;
readout storage means for storing the image data read out from the image information storage means;
instruction control means for providing instruction information for instructing the content of the image to be displayed on the display means;
Display control means for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data according to the content instructed in the instruction information;
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
a first control means for causing the image data set to be used in predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means to be read into the read storage means;
a second control means for displaying an image on the display means based on the use of the image data read into the read storage means according to the content instructed in the predetermined instruction information;
Equipped with
Storage source information for specifying an area where the image data is stored in the image information storage means is set in the predetermined instruction information,
When the image data specified in the predetermined instruction information is read into the read storage means by executing a transfer process using the storage source information, the first control means setting storage destination information for specifying an area from which the image data has been read in the reading storage means in the predetermined instruction information;
The second control means reads out the image data specified in the predetermined instruction information by using the predetermined instruction information after the storage destination information is set by the first control means. The image data is read out from a storage area of the readout storage means, and the image is displayed on the display means based on the readout image data being used in accordance with the contents instructed in the predetermined instruction information. can be,
The first control means controls the predetermined control means in a situation where the second control means is performing a process of displaying an image on the display means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at a predetermined update timing. The image data is read into the read storage means in accordance with the predetermined instruction information for displaying an image at an update timing later than the update timing of
A storage area for storing the predetermined instruction information provided by the instruction control means and a storage area for storing the predetermined instruction information for which the setting of the storage destination information by the first control means has been completed are distinguished. and
The specific image data is configured to be stored across a plurality of storage areas in the readout storage means,
The first control means is configured to identify the plurality of storage areas when the specific image data is read into the plurality of storage areas by executing a transfer process using the storage source information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting the identification information of the storage location information to the predetermined instruction information .

Images